· IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1...

215
IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 0 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V), Keesara (M), Medchal 501 301 DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING B TECH - IV YEAR I-SEM STUDENT HANDBOOK A.Y. 2018-19

Transcript of  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1...

Page 1:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 0

HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE

(COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING)

Bogaram (V), Keesara (M), Medchal – 501 301

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

B TECH - IV YEAR I-SEM

STUDENT HANDBOOK

A.Y. 2018-19

Page 2:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1

HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE

(COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING)

Bogaram (V), Keesara (M), Medchal – 501 301

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VISION:

To be a premier institute in the country and region for the study of engineering, technology and

management by maintaining high academic standards which promote the analytical thinking and

independent judgment among the prime stakeholders enabling them to function responsibly in the

globalized society.

MISSION:

To impart quality professional education that meets the needs of present and emerging

technological world.

To strive for student achievement and success, preparing them for life and leadership with ethics.

To provide a scholarly and vibrant learning environment that enables faculty, staff and students

achieve personal and professional growth.

To contribute to advancement of knowledge, in both fundamental and applied areas of engineering,

technology & management.

To undertake research and development works by forging alliances with research institutes,

government organizations, industries and alumni and become a centre of excellence for quality

professional educations and research.

MISSION AND VISION OF THE ECE DEPARTMENT:

Vision: To be a world leader and renowned for Electronics & Communication Engineering and

research.

Mission:

M1: To educate graduates in the basic principles underlying the field of Electronics &

Communication Engineering.

M2: To train our students to think independently in terms to master systematic approach to problem

solving.

M3: To have a keen awareness of the role of engineering in the modern society.

Page 3:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 2

TABLE OF CONTENT

S NO CONTENT PAGE NO

I COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR

II IV YEAR I SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE

1 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 1.1. Course Overview

1.2. Prerequisite

1.3. Marks Distribution

1.4. Evaluation Scheme

1.5. Course Outcomes & Objectives

1.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed

1.7. JNTUH Syllabus

1.8. Course Plan

1.9.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the

Program Outcomes

1.10 Question Bank

1.11. Assignment Questions

1.12. Objective Questions

4-44

2 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 2.1. Course Description

2.2. Prerequisite

2.3. Marks Distribution

2.4. Evaluation Scheme

2.5. Course Outcomes

2.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed

2.7. JNTUH Syllabus

2.8. Course Plan

2.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the

Program Outcomes

2.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the Program Outcomes 2.11. Objective Questions

2.12. Tutorial Questions

2.13.Assignment Questions

45-90

3 MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

3.1. Course Description

3.2. Prerequisite

3.3. Marks Distribution

3.4. Evaluation Scheme

3.5. Course Outcomes

3.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed

3.7. JNTUH Syllabus

3.8. Course Plan

3.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the

Program Outcomes

3.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the

Program Outcomes

3.11.Tutorial Questions

91-128

Page 4:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 3

312.Objective Questions

3.13.Assignment Questions

4 COMPUTER NETWORKS

4.1. Course Description

4.2. Prerequisite

4.3. Marks Distribution

4.4. Evaluation Scheme

4.5. Course Outcomes

4.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed

4.7. JNTUH Syllabus

4.8. Course Plan

4.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement

the Program Outcomes

4.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement

of the Program Outcomes

4.11.Assignment Topics

4.12. Objective Questions

129-157

5 CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 5.1. Course Description

5.2. Prerequisite

5.3. Marks Distribution

5.4. Evaluation Scheme

5.5. Course Outcomes

5.6. JNTUH Syllabus

5.7. Course Plan

5.8. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the

Achievement of the Program Outcomes

5.9.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the

Achievement of the Program Outcomes

5.10.Question Bank

5.11. Objective Questions

5.12. Tutorial Questions

158-187

6 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS DESIGN 6.1. Course Description

6.2. Prerequisite

6.3. Marks Distribution

6.4. Evaluation Scheme

6.5. Course Objectives and Outcomes

6.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed

6.7. JNTUH Syllabus

6.8. Course Plan

6.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the

Program Outcomes

6.10.Mapping Course Out comes Leading to the Achievement of the

Programme out comes

6.10.Ouestion Bank

6.11.Asssignment Questions

188-212

Page 5:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 4

1.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

The Course is intended to familiarize the students with the framework for the managers and leaders

available for understanding and making decisions relating to issues related organizational

structure,productions,operations,marketing, Human Resource Management, product management

and strategy.

1.2 PRE-REQUISITES:

S.NO COURSE

NAME DESCRIPTION SEM

1

Managerial

Economics and

Financial

Accounting

To enable the student to

understand and appreciate, with

a particular insight, the

importance of certain basic

issues governing the business

operations namely; demand and

supply, production function, cost

analysis, markets, forms of

business organizations, capital

budgeting and financial

accounting and financial

analysis.

II-II

PROGRAMME: B.Tech ECE

AC:YEAR: 2018-19

DEGREE: B.TECH IV YEAR

COURSE: MANAGEMENT SCIENCE SEMESTER: I CREDITS: 4

COURSECOORDINATOR:

Mr.GANDI RAMU

COURSECODE: A70014

REGULATION: R15

COURSE TYPE: REGULAR

COURSE AREA/DOMAIN: ECE CONTACT HOURS: 4 hours/Week.

CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE

CODE: NA

LAB COURSE NAME: NA

Page 6:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 5

1.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End

Exam

Marks

Total Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of

subjective type and objective type tests.

The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60

minutes duration.

Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the

student has to answer 2 questions, each

carrying 5 marks.

The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20

minutes duration. It consists of 10 multiple

choice and 10 objective type questions, the

student has to answer all the questions and

each carries half mark.

First midterm examination shall be conducted

for the first two and half units of syllabus and

second midterm examination shall be

conducted for the remaining portion.

Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments.

There shall be two assignments in every theory

course. Marks shall be awarded considering

the average of two assignments in each course.

75 100

Page 7:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 6

1.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S.

No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 90minutes 20

2 I Assignment - 5

3 II Mid Examination 90minutes 20

4 II Assignment - 5

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

1.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES & OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms

Level

To understand the concept of

management, administration,

organization, objectives, nature, scope,

role, responsibilities & approaches of a

management.

Able to apply the concepts &

principles of management in

real life industry. Able to

design & develop

organization chart &

structure for an enterprise

BL

1,2,3

To understand the role of management

in production through PPC, Plant

Location & Layout techniques, Quality

Control, Work-study. To study

Materials/Purchases/Stores/Inventory

Management

Able to identify Marketing

Mix Strategies for an

enterprise. Able to apply the

concepts of HRM in

Recruitment, Selection,

Training & Development

BL 2,5

To Study Management of Marketing

Mix, Physical Distribution & PLC

Strategies. To study HRM/PMIR by

Recruitment, Selection, Training &

Development.

Able to apply PPC

techniques, Quality Control,

Work-study principles in real

life industry. Able to

maintain Materials

departments, & Determine

EOQ

BL

1,2,5

Page 8:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 7

To understand Strategic Mgt. & SWOT,

CPP & Different types of functional

strategies of a SBU. To study MIS,

ERP, MRP, TQM, CMM, SCM, BPO,

BPR, Bench Marking and Balance

Score Card.

Able to develop Mission,

Objectives, Goals &

strategies for an enterprise in

dynamic environment. Able

to understand & apply

modern management

techniques MIS, ERP, MRP,

TQM, CMM, SCM, BPO,

BPR, Bench Marking and

Balance Score Card

wherever possible.

BL

2,5,6

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

1.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

Blooms

Level

A

Able to apply the concepts &

principles of management in

real life industry.

S

Text book

And

CaseStudie

s

APPLY

B

Able to design & develop

organization chart &

structure for an enterprise

S

Text book

and

CaseStudie

s

APPLY

C

Able to apply PPC

techniques, Quality Control,

Work-study principles in

real life industry.

H

Assignmen

t and

Textbook

questions

Apply

and

Analyze

D

Able to maintain Materials

departments, & Determine

EOQ

S Textbook

Questions Apply

E

Able to identify Marketing

Mix Strategies for an

enterprise.

S Text Book

Questions Apply

F

Able to apply the concepts

of HRM in Recruitment,

Selection, Training &

Development

H Business

Magazines --

G

Able to develop PERT/CPM

Charts for projects of an

enterprise and estimate time

S

Solving

Text book

Problems

Analyze and

Justify

Page 9:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 8

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

1.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT - I:

Introduction to Management and Organisation: Concepts of Management and organization-

nature, importance and Functions of Management, Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's

Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy

of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's Theory X and Theory Y - Hertzberg Two Factor Theory of

Motivation - Leadership Styles, Social responsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational

Structures: Basic concepts related to Organization - Departmentation and Decentralization, Types

and Evaluation of mechanistic and organic structures of organisation and suitability.

UNIT - II:

Operations and Marketing Management: Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of

Production(Job, batch and Mass Production), Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method

Study and Work Measurement - Business Process Reengineering(BPR) - Statistical Quality

Control: control charts for Variables and Attributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance Sampling,

TQM, Six Sigma, Deming's contribution to quality, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ, ABC

Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores Management and Store Records - JIT System, Supply Chain

Management, Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on Product

Life Cycle, Channels of distribution.

& cost of project.

H

Able to develop Mission,

Objectives, Goals &

strategies for an enterprise in

dynamic environment

S Business

Magazines Analyze

I

Able to understand & apply

modern management

techniques MIS, ERP, MRP,

TQM, CMM, SCM, BPO,

BPR, Bench Marking and

Balance Score Card

wherever possible.

N Class Test

& Seminar Analyze

Page 10:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 9

UNIT - III:

Human Resources Management(HRM): Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management

and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager: Manpower

planning, Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, Placement, Wage and Salary

Administration, Promotion, Transfer, Separation, Performance Appraisal, Grievance Handling and

Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating - Capability Maturity Model (CMM)

Levels - Performance Management System.

UNIT - IV:

Project Management (PERT/ CPM): Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review

Technique (PERT), Critical Path Method (CPM), Identifying critical path, Probability of

Completing the project within given time, Project Cost Analysis, Project Crashing (simple

problems).

UNIT - V:

Strategic Management and Contemporary Strategic Issues: Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy,

Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning Process, Environmental Scanning, Value

Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy Formulation and Implementation, Generic

Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced Score Card as Contemporary Business

Strategies.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Stoner, Freeman, Gilbert, Management, 6th Ed, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.

2. P. Vijay Kumar, N. Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, Cengage Learning India, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kotler Philip and Keller Kevin Lane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.

2. Hill, 2012.

3. Thomas N. Duening and John M. Ivancevich Management - Principles and Guidelines, Biztantra,

2012.

4. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2012.

5. Samuel C. Certo: Modern Management, 2012.

6. Schermerhorn, Capling, Poole and Wiesner: Management, Wiley, 2012.

Page 11:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 10

1.8 COURSE PLAN:

Lecture

no. Unit Topic Reference

1 I

Introduction to Concepts of Management and

organization- A2,A3

2 I

Nature and Importance of Management,

Functions of Management A2,A3

3 I Taylor’s Scientific Management Theory A2,A3

4 I

Fayol’s Principles of Management, Maslow’s

Theory of Human Needs A2,A3

5 I Doglas McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y A2,A3

6 I Herberg’s Two-Factor Theory of Motivation A2,A3

7 I Systems Approach to Management A2,A3

8 I Leadership Styles A2,A3

9 I Social responsibilities of Management. A2,A3

10 I

Basic concepts related to Organisation –

Departmentation and Decentralisation A2,A3

11 I

Types of mechanistic and organic structures

of organisation A2,A3

12 I

Line organization, Line and staff , functional,

Committee A2,A3

13 I

matrix, Virtual, Cellular , team structure,

boundary less, inverted pyramid A2,A3

14 I

lean and flat organization str. and their merits,

demerits and suitability. A2,A3

15 II

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-

Methods of production A4

16 II

Work Study -Basic procedure involved in

Method Study and Work Measure A4

17 II Statistical Quality Control: X chart A4

18 II R chart A4

19 II c chart& p chart A4

20 II simple Problems on SQC A4

21 II

Acceptance Sampling, Deming’s contribution

to quality A4

22 II Materials Management: Objectives A4

23 II Need for Inventory control A4

24 II EOQ, ABC Analysis A4

25 II Purchase Procedure A4

26 II Stores Management A4

27 II Stores Records - Supply Chain Management A4

28 II Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix A1

29 II

Marketing Strategies based on Product Life

Cycle. A1

Page 12:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 11

30 II Channels of distribution. A1

31 III Concepts of HRM, A5,A6

32 III

HRD and Personnel Management and

Industrial Relations A5,A6

33 III HRM vs. PMIR A5,A6

34 III

Basic functions of HR Manager: Manpower

planning, A5,A6

35 III Recruitment& Selection A5,A6

36 III

Training and Development, Placement, Wage

and Salary Administration A5,A6

37 III Wage and Salary Administration A5,A6

38 III Promotion, Transfer, Separation, A5,A6

39 III Performance Appraisal, Grievance Handling A5,A6

40 III Welfare Administration, A5,A6

41 III Job Evaluation and Merit Rating A5,A6

42 IV Network Analysis A4

43 IV

Programme Evaluation and Review

Technique (PERT) A4

44 IV

Critical Path Method (CPM), Identifying

critical path A4

45 IV

Probability of Completing the project within

given time A4

46 IV Project Cost Analysis, A4

47 IV Project Crashing. A4

48 IV simple problems on PERT & CPM A4

49 V

Strategic Management: Mission, Goals,

Objectives, Policy A2,A6,A7

50 V

Strategy, Programmers, Elements of

Corporate Planning Process A2,A6,A7

51 V Environmental Scanning, SWOT Analysis A2,A7

52 V Total Quality Management (TQM) A2,A7

53 V Six sigma A2,A7

54 V Capability Maturity Model (CMM) Levels A2,A7

55 V Value Chain Analysis A2,A7

56 V Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) A2,A7

57 V Performance Management A2,A7

58 V Business Process outsourcing A2,A7

59 V Business Process Re-engineering A2,A7

60 V Bench Marking A2,A7

61 V Balanced Score Card. A2,A7

Page 13:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 12

MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Course Outcomes

a b c d

I H S

II S H

III H S

IV S H

S= Supportive H= Highly Related

1.9 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Cour

se

Outc

omes

Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i

a H H

b H S S

c H H S

d S S H

S= Supportive H= Highly Relate

1.10 QUESTION BANK:

Unit-I

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION

Group – A (Short Answer Questions)

S.No Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

1. Define Management

Understand

2. Distinguish between formal and informal

organization. Understand

Page 14:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 13

3. Define organisaton.

Understand

4. Explain levels of management

Apply

5. Explain nature of management

Apply

6. Discuss the importance of management.

Remember

7. Explain Scalar Chain.

Remember

8. Discuss about leadership styles in organization.

Understand

9. Define departmentation.

Understand

10. List the advantages of line and staff organization

structure. Apply

11. Define committee and matrix organization

structure. Understand

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. Explain the functions of management.

Remember

2. Distinguish between manager and leader .List out

their merits and demerits. Understand

3. Explain 14 principles of management.

Evaluate

4. Discuss about Herzberg’s and Maslow’s theories.

Understand

5. Illustrate social responsibility of management

Evaluate

6. Elaborate types of organization structures.

Evaluate

7. Explain Scientific management theory.

Understand

8. Explain Mc. Gregor’s theory X and theory Y

Understand

9. Explain system approach to management

Understand

UNIT-II

OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Discuss principles of Plant layout

Understand

2 Define Production management.

Understand

3 Explain Job shop method of production

Understand

Page 15:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 14

4 Define Batch production.

Understand

5 Explain Mass production.

Understand

6 Define work study

Understand

7 Explain method study.

Analyze

8 Explain work measurement.

Analyze

9 What is meant by ABC analysis?

Understand

10 Define purchasing.

Understand

11 What is meant by marketing?

Understand

12 What are the elements of marketing mix.

Analyze

13 Define product and price.

Understand

14 Explain JIT.

Understand

15 What is EOQ?

Evaluate

16 Define Business process reengineering.

Understand

Group – B (Long Answer Questions)

1 Explain the types of plant layout and list out its

advantages and disadvantages. Evaluate

2 List out the steps involved in work study.

Understand

3 Explain the steps involved in method study.

Evaluate

4 Elaborate work measurement.

Evaluate

5 Explain purchasing process.

Understand

6 Explain the steps involved in managing store

records. Analyze

7 Explain nature and importance of marketing.

Analyze

8 Explain functions of marketing.

Understand

9 Discuss about product, price, place and promotion.

Evaluate

10 Explain channels of distribution and its elements.

Analyze

11 Illustrate product life cycle.

Evaluate.

12 Explain briefly about statistical control charts.

Understand

Page 16:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 15

GROUP - C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Problems on statistical quality control charts X,

R, C, and P chart Apply

UNIT-III

Human Resource Management

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What is HRM?

Remember

2 Distinguish between HRM and Personnel Management

Remember

3 What is mean by Recruitment?

Understand

4 Define Manpower Planning.

Understand

5 Explain Human Resource Development.

Analyze

6 Discuss about Industrial Relations.

Analyze

7 Distinguish between training and development.

Understand

8 Define Recruitment.

Understand

9 Explain compensation.

Understand

10 What is meant by salary and wages?

Understand

11 List out fringe benefits provided to employees in

organization. Understand

12 Distinguish between employee and employees.

Understand

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain functions of HRM.

Understand

2 Explain the sources of Recruitment.

Analyze

3 Discuss the steps involved in selection process.

Analyze

4 Explain methods of training.

Evaluate

5 Discuss about promotion, transfer and demotion.

Analyze

6 Explain briefly methods of performance appraisal

Evaluate

Page 17:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 16

7 Explain techniques of job evaluation.

Evaluate

8 Illustrate capability maturity model.

Evaluate

9 What is performance management system.

Evaluate

10 What is Grievance handling and welfare administration

in organization? Understand

UNIT-IV

PROJECT MANGEMENT

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define project management.

Understand

2 What is meant by an activity?

Understand

3 Define event.

Understand

4 Define precedent.

Understand

5 What is meant optimistic time

Understand

6 Explain pessimistic time.

Understand

7 Explain most likely time.

Understand

8 Define critical path

Understand

9 Elaborate and explain PERT.

Analyze

10 Explain latest time and earliest time

Analyze

11 Define slack

Understand

12 Explain project cost.

Analyze

13 Explain project crashing.

Evaluate

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Discuss basic fundamentals of project management.

Evaluate

2 Distinguish between PERT and CPM.

Analyze

3 List out advantages and disadvantages of PERT.

Understand

4 List out advantages and disadvantages of CPM.

Understand

Page 18:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 17

GROUP - C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Problem on drawing network diagram. Analyze

2 Problems on finding critical path Evaluate

3 Problems on identifying slack value Analyze

4 Problems on project cost and crashing Evaluate

UNIT- V

STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARAY STRATEGIC ISSUES

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define strategy

Understand

2 What is meant by goal?

Understand

3 Explain mission.

Apply

4 What is objective?

Understand

5 Explain policy.

Understand

6 Discuss about programmers in organization.

Analyze

7 Define environmental scanning.

Understand

8 Define value chain analysis.

Understand

9 Discuss the application of SWOT in organization.

Apply

10 Define benchmarking.

Understand

11 Explain balance scorecard.

Understand

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS):

1 Explain the elements of corporate planning process.

Apply

2 Explain environmental scanning process.

Understand

3 What are the steps involved in vale analysis.

Understand

4 List advantages, disadvantages and application of

value analysis. Apply

5 Explain steps involved in strategy formulation and

implementation. Understand

Page 19:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 18

1.11 ASSIGNMENT TOPICS:

UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION

SNo Questions Blooms Taxonomy

Level

1 Explain the functions of management.

Remember

2 Discuss about leadership styles in organization. Understand

3 Elaborate types of organization structures. Evaluate

4 Explain 14 principles of management. Evaluate

5 Explain Mc. Gregor’s theory X and theory Y Understand

UNIT II

OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT

1 Explain the types of plant layout and list out its advantages

and disadvantages. Evaluate

2 List out the steps involved in work study. Understand

3 Explain purchasing process. Understand

4 Discuss about product, price, place and promotion. Evaluate

5 Illustrate product life cycle. Evaluate

6 Explain briefly about statistical control charts. Understand

UNIT- III

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

1. Explain functions of HRM. Understand

2. Discuss the steps involved in selection process. Analyze

3. Explain methods of training. Evaluate

4. Explain briefly methods of performance appraisal Evaluate

5. Illustrate capability maturity model. Evaluate

6. What is Grievance handling and welfare administration in

organization? Understand

UNIT- IV

6 Illustrate contemporary business strategies.

Evaluate

Page 20:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 19

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1. Problem on drawing network diagram. Analyze

2. Problems on finding critical path

Evaluate

3. Problems on identifying slack value Analyze

4. Problems on project cost and crashing Evaluate

UNIT-V

STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES

1. Explain the elements of corporate planning process. Apply

2. Explain environmental scanning process. Understand

3. List advantages, disadvantages and application of value

analysis. Apply

4. What are the steps involved in vale analysis. Understand

5 Explain steps involved in strategy formulation and

implementation. Understand

6 Illustrate contemporary business strategies. Evaluate

1.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT – I

UNIT-I Introduction to Management and Organisation:

1. Who is a person who advanced early scientific management principles?

(a) Weber

(b) Taylor

(c) Vest

(d) Fayol

2. A reporting relationship in which an employee receives orders from, and reports to, only one supervisor is

known as:

(a) Line of authority.

Page 21:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 20

(b) Centralization.

(c) Unity of direction.

(d) Unity of command.

3. Which worked on administrative management theory:

I. Fayol

II. Parker

III. Weber

A I and III

B II and III

C none of these worked on administrative management theory

D I , II, and III

4. is the study of how to create an organizational structure that leads to high efficiency and effectiveness.

(a) Scientific management

(b) Job specialization

(c) Administrative management

(d) Allocation management

5. is the singleness of purpose that makes possible the creation of one plan of action to guide

managers in resource allocations.

(a) Unity of direction

(b) Unity of command

(c) Unity of authority

(d) Unity of resources

6. Which is an organizational - environmental theory?

I. The open-systems view

II. Contingency theory

III. The Theory of Bureaucracy

Page 22:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 21

IV. Theory Z

I and II

(a) I, III, and IV

II, III, and IV

I, II, and III

7. Theory is based on positive assumptions about workers.

(a) Z

(b) X

(c) Y

(d) C

7. The theory states a manager's choice of organizational structures and control systems

depends on characteristics of the external environment.

Mechanistic

(a) Management science

(b) Organic

(c) Contingency

8. Which is not one of Fayol's principles:

(a) Authority and responsibility

(b) Line of authority

(c) Globalization

(d) Unity of command

9. Which is not a management science theory:

(a) Operations Management

(b) TQM

(c) MIS

(d) None of these

Page 23:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 22

10. Theory states that the average employee is lazy and will try to do as little as possible.

(a) X

(b) Y

(c) Z

d) None

11. In recent history, workers have felt that they should be empowered in the workplace. This is an example of

(a) social influences

(b) political influences

(c) technological influences

(d) global influences

12. Scientific management, administrative management, and bureaucratic management belong to the

management viewpoint known as the

(a) classical perspective

(b) behavioral perspective

(c) quantitative perspective

(d) systems perspective

13. The theorist that advocated standard methodology for doing a task and suggested that workers were

motivated by pay according to output (piecework) is

(a) Elton Mayo

(b) Max Weber

(c) Frederick Taylor

(d) Henri Fayol

15. As a Theory Y manager, you believe that your employees

(a) Dislike work and will avoid it if possible.

(b) Need a hierarchy of authority and lots of rules and regulations.

Page 24:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 23

(c) Should be trained to standard methodology in all their tasks.

(d) Are self-motivated and self-directed toward achieving organizational goals.

14.

(a) Scientific management theory is an outdated management theory.

(b) Managers should apply classical management theory to their everyday work if they want to be

more effective.

(c) A traditional approach to management can be successfully applied to the problems of a modern

organisation.

(d) Quality usually suffers as productivity increases.

15. According to Frederick Taylor, who was to blame for the inefficiency in organisations?

(a) The unions.

(b) The managers.

(c) The organisation as a whole.

(d) The workers

16. Which of these was not an integral part of scientific management?

(a) Differential pay rates.

(b) Worker control of production.

(c) Systematic selection of workers.

(d) Work specialization

17. Which of the following is not a valid criticism of scientific management theory?

(a) Increases in pay for workers were not proportional to increases in productivity.

(b) Worker discretion over the execution of the task was reduced.

(c) Jobs became too complex for workers to handle.

(d) Fear of redundancy was increased.

18. Which of the following is not a fundamental characteristics of Bureaucratic Management?

What does the case, ‘Scientific management in action’ illustrate?

Page 25:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 24

(a) Specialization of labor

(b) Well defined hierarchy

(c) Striving to be a ‘first-class worker’

(d) Formal rules and regulations.

19. Which of these statements concerning Weber’s concept of Bureaucracy is not correct?

(a) It is based on rules and procedures rather than personal preference and judgment.

(b) It is still a relevant concept in today’s organisation.

(c) It has acquired a negative reputation for inefficiency and rigidity.

(d) It rejects rational approaches to managing organizations

20. Which of the following was an early key management idea, pre-dating the work of Frederick Taylor and

Max Weber?

(a) Differential pay rates.

(b) Rule-by-the-office.

(c) Work specialization.

(d) Classical management theory.

21. Which of the following was the key aim of scientific management?

(a) To increase worker control of production.

(b) To increase productivity.

(c) To decrease absenteeism.

(d) To develop time-and-motion studies.

22. Which of the following is NOT a key concept associated with scientific management?

(a) One best way.

(b) Formalization.

(c) Time-and-motion studies.

(d) Systematic selection.

Page 26:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 25

23. Contingency theory suggests which of the following as a limitation of classical management theory?

(a) Management approaches need to take into account the informal social life of workers at work.

(b) Management approaches need to take into account complexity and instability in the environment.

(c) Everything is contingent upon the workers in an organization.

(d) Management practices need to recognize stability in the environment

Unit-II Operations and Marketing Management

1. Planning is:

(a) looking ahead,

(b) guiding people,

(c) delegation of authority,

(d) fundamentals of staffing

2. Single use plans are:

(a) applicable in non-recurring situation,

(b) deals with recurring situations,

(c) budgets,

(d) strategic

3. Programs are a complex of:

(a) budgets,

(b) goals & policies,

rules,

(c) None of the above.

[Hint: Programs are complex of goals, policies, rules, procedures, tasks.]

Page 27:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 26

4. The limitations of planning are:

(a) proper environment,

(b) planning premises,

(c) wrong information,

feasibility.

[Hint: Wrong information and time involved are the limitations of planning.]

5. What are the three levels of planning?

(a) Operational, intermediate and strategic

(b) Headquarters, divisional and local

(c) Top, middle and bottom

(d) None of the above

6. All of the following would be steps or concerns in the process of strategic planning except:

(a) Designing a sound business portfolio.

(b) Checking to see if an advertising spot had been run in its allotted time slot.

(c) Setting supporting objectives.

(d) Defining a clear company mission.

7. Identify the best definition of planning.

(a) An integrated process, in which plans are formulated, carried out and controlled.

(b) The core activity of planners and planning departments.

(c) Setting an organization’s objectives and the means of reaching them.

(d) Devising ways of achieving the objectives of an organisation.

8. Budget refers to

(a) Planned target of performance

(b) Steps of handling future activities

(c) Systematic action and allocation of resources

Page 28:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 27

(d) Statement of expected results expressed in numerical terms

9. Which of the following indicates the importance of planning?

(a) Makes way for orderly activities

(b) Provides a basic for control in an organization

(c) Reduces risk of uncertainty

(d) All of the above.

10. Which of the following is not a technique of planning?

(a) Budgeting

(b) Balanced score card

(c) PERT CPM

(d) Management by Objectives.

11. plans have clearly defined objectives

(a) Directional

(b) Flexible

(c) Specific

(d) Standing.

12. Organizing refers to:

(a) planning,

(b) delegation of authority,

(c) training,

(d) selection

13. Organizing aims to serve:

(a) common purpose,

(b) corruption,

(c) authority structure,

Page 29:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 28

(d) All of the above.

14. Organizing destroys:

(a) individual relationships,

(b) plans,

(c) simplicity in the organization,

(d) Environment.

15. The principle of objective states:

(a) delegation of authority,

(b) existence for a purpose,

(c) formal organization,

(d) none of the above.[Hint: An organization must exist for a purpose is the principle of objective.]

16. For effective organizing, an organization required:

(a) principle of balance,

(b) span of management,

(c) organization process,

(d) Planning and forecasting.

17. The structure of organization includes:

(a) identification and classification of required activities,

(b) informal organization,

(c) establishing enterprise objectives,

(d) Authority relationships.

18. The degree to which an organization relies on rules and procedures to direct the behavior of employees is:

(a) complexity,

Page 30:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 29

(b) formalization,

(c) centralization,

(d) motivation.

18. In a formal organization, “power” is associated with:

(a) an individual,

(b) position,

(c) relationship,

(d) control

19. Delegation is:

(a) a continuous process,

(b) unfolding talents,

(c) Granting the right to command.

[Hint: Delegation is the act of granting of conferring something and the term authority means right to

command.]

20. Unity of command means:

(a) parity of authority and responsibility,

(b) flow of command from subordinate to superior,

(c) flow of command from superior to subordinate,

(d) Parity in controlling.

21. Defective delegation:

(a) hampers coordination

(b) size of the organization,

(c) establish proper controls,

(d) Establish sources of powers.

22. Indicate which of the following is NOT among the six main types of organization structure–

Page 31:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 30

(a) Line organization

(b) Functional structure

(c) Committees

(d) Department

23. Organization structure is primarily concerned with and of tasks and authority.

(a) Allocation and Delegation

(b) Allocation and apportionment

(c) Reporting and delegating

(d) Setting standards and delegation

24. Line organization is also known as organization.

(a) Scalar

(b) Chain

(c) Matrix

(d) Project

Unit –III Human Resource Management:

1. Selection devices must:

(a) be explained,

(b) match the job in question,

(c) to be cost-effective

(d) None of the above.

2. The popular on-the-job training methods include:

(a) job rotation,

(b) classroom lectures,

films.

(c) description and displays

Page 32:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 31

[Hint: On-the-job training methods allow the workers to work in a realistic work environment and gather

experiences.]

3. Need refers to:

(a) control information and performance review,

(b) key result areas and statement of objectives,

(c) agree what you expect from me,

(d) All of the above.

[Hint: Need states agree what you refer from me and give me an opportunity to perform.]

4. Staffing refers to:

(a) measuring performance,

(b) managing the positions,

(c) management in action,

(d) making strategic plans.

[Hint: Staffing refers to appointing the right person for the right job.]

5. Non-financial incentives have many things to do with:

(a) Directing,

(b) Motivation,

(c) Planning,

(d) organising.

6. Staffing needs:

(a) man power planning,

(b) authority,

(c) communication,

(d) coordination.

[Hint: Staffing needs estimates of present and future needs of managerial man power and therefore it

needs some pre-thinking.]

Page 33:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 32

7. HRD refers to:

(a) remuneration,

(b) development,

(c) controlling,

(d) planning

8. Recruitment covers:

(a) selection,

(b) job analysis,

(c) time,

(d) none of the above.

[Hint: Recruitment covers job analysis, job design and job descriptions.]

9. Training is the process of:

(a) motivation

(b) increasing knowledge and skill

(c) Testing.

(d) Employee recommendations.

10. Vestibule training provides the worker with:

(a) on the job training,

(b) off the job training,

(c) real life presentations off the job

(d) demonstration

[Hint: The worker is provided with a real life presentation but not on the job directly.]

11. What is the meaning of the acronym HRM?

Page 34:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 33

(a) Human Resource Management.

(b) Humanistic Resource Management.

(c) Human Resource Management.

(d) Human Relations Management.

12. Which of the following is not a function normally performed by the HR department?

(a) Recruitment and selection.

(b) Accounting.

(c) Training and development.

(d) Pay and reward.

13. Recruitment and selection must be effective to ensure it:

(a) Offsets high labour turnover

(b) Delivers the highest calibre of individuals at optimum most

(c) To have a surplus in case of sickness and absence

(d) Encourages new blood into the organization.

14. Which of the following is not a selection technique?

(a) Performance appraisal

(b) Ability test

(c) Psychometric testing

(D)Interviews

15. The primary aim of recruitment and selection process is to

(a) Meet the high labour turnover

(b) Hire the best individuals at optimum cost

(c) Ensure the availability of surplus in case of sickness and absence

(d) None of the above.

16. Job evaluation is conducted to develop

Page 35:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 34

(a) Compensation package

(b) Training modules

(c) Organisational grapevine

(d) Rules and policies.

17. Which of the following defines the process of recruitment?

(a) Forecasting the demand of human resources

(b) Forecasting the supply of human resources

(c) Discovering potential job candidates for a particular position

(d) Making a hire or no hire decision.

18. Which of the following is not a type of remuneration system under Time Rate System?

(a) High wage plan

(b) Measured day work

(c) Taylor System

(d) Differential time rate.

19. Which of the following functions or activities requires recruiting and placing qualified personnel needed for the

organization so that it may achieve its objectives and goals?

(a) Planning

(b) Staffing

(c) Organizing

(d) Controlling.

20. Direction refers to:

(a) planning,

(b) organizing,

(c) driving,

(d) staffing

Page 36:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 35

21.Follett pointed that reform was possible provided the following consideration were taken into account:

(a) building up new attitudes,

(b) planning

(c) negative attitudes,

(d) None of the above.

21. The characteristics of direction include:

(a) guiding,

(b) motivating,

(c) planning,

(d) performance appraisal

22. Direction is a:

(a) discrete process,

(b) continuous process,

(c) circular process,

(d) supervisory process

23. The principles of direction do not include:

(a) to have a thorough knowledge about the terms to bind the employees and the organization,

(b) to remove the inefficient employees,

(c) labour turnover,

(d) to have an effective communication superior and his subordinates.

24. The techniques of direction excludes:

(a) an alternative device of communication,

(b) supervisory techniques,

(c) coordination,

(d) Standard practices and procedures.

Page 37:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 36

Hint: Coordination refers to the link between the different functions of management.

UNIT-IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT:

1. All of the following are traditional project management techniques for scheduling and planning except

a) CPM

b) PLAN

c) Gantt Chart

d) PERT

2. In a CPM/PERT network, an event refers to

a) The occurrence of a delay in the project

b) an activity inserted into the network to show a precedence relationship with no passage of time

c) the beginning or completion of an activity or project

d) the earliest an activity can start

3. The critical path is referred to as the

a) most direct path from the beginning node to the ending node

b) Shortest path in terms of time

c) Longest path in terms of time

d) Path with the largest amount of slack time

3. Activities on the critical path are critical because they

a) Represent the maximum project completion time

b) Cannot tolerate any delay in completion

c) Represent the most expense in terms of resources

d) Represent the largest and most complex activities of the project

4. The four basic types of production processes are

a) Project, batch, job shop, intermittent

b) Project, batch, job shop, assembly

c) Project, batch, mass, continuous

d) project, job shop, intermittent, continuous

Page 38:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 37

5. Which of the following processes would be best suited for building a dam?

a) Project

b) Continuous

c) Batch

d) Mass

6. Activity definition is a part of what knowledge area?

a. Integration

b. Time

c. Cost

d. Quality

7. During project execution

a. Project goals and scope are highlighted.

b. the products of the project are produced.

c. overall key stakeholder analysis is provided.

d. the WBS is scheduled.

8. Project execution involves taking actions to

a. establish a good plan.

b. close out the project.

c. ensure that activities in the project plan are completed.

d. provide feedback to key vendors.

9. the most important output of project execution is

a. change requests.

b. work products.

c. stakeholder analysis.

d. the WBS.

10. There are four stages in the project management lifecycle. Which is not one of the stages?

a. Definition and Conceptualization

b. Management and Measurement

c. Planning and Budgeting

d. Execution and Control

e. Termination and closure

Page 39:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 38

11. In which of the stages is scope management mostly involved?

a. Definition and Conceptualization

b. Management and Measurement

c. Planning and Budgeting

d. Execution and Control

e. Termination and closure

12. An activity has probabilistic completion times of 20, 30 and 46. What is its mean time?

a. 16

b. 43

c. 21

d. 31

e. None of these

13. Any technique that uses only one time estimate is considered to be a ______________ technique.

a. Deterministic

b. Stochastic

c. Probabilistic

d. Random

14. Typically, project teams include individuals

a) from other areas in the organization

b) selected because of their special skills

c) from the functional area of the project

d) all of the above

Page 40:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 39

UNIT-V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY

STRATEGIC ISSUES:

1.Which of the following is a method for maintaining the minimum inventory of raw materials and

finished goods?

A.Just-in-time

B.Material requirement planning

C.Production schedule

D.Delivery schedule

Motivation

2 according to BCG Matrix, question marks are

(a) SBU’s with a large market share in a fast growing market.

(b) SBU’s with a low market share in an intensely competitive, mature industry

Characterized by low profits .

(c) SBU’s with an uncertainty about their future.

(d) SBU’s which are characterized by low market share and high growth.

3. SWOT analysis helps in formulating effective strategies for the company to deal with

Competitors.

a. suppliers.

b. distributors.

c. customers.

d. Agents

4. Which of the following is not the stage or stages of the ‘competitive intelligence system’?

A. Setting up the system

B. Value analysis

C. Data collection

D. Analysis and evaluation of data

Page 41:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 40

5. Strategic planning as a broad concept consists of

A.corporate strategy and business strategy

B.strategy formulation and strategy implementation

c.inputs and outputs

d.environmental analysis and internal analysis

6. Early theories about how individuals make decisions were based on the concept of a(n)

(a) A. utilitarian philosophy

(b) B.action man

(c) C.economic man

D. attentive man

7. Policies are sometimes defined as a(n)

A.shortcut for thinking

(a) action plan

(b) substitute for strategy

(c) substitute for management authority

8. In general, if a policy is not thought out and established

(a) a situation requiring action will arise

(b) social issues will cause change in the organization

(c) managers will be hired from the outside

(d) there will be significant staff turnover

9------------- is small groups of workers who meet regularly with their supervisor to solve work related problem

(a) Quality of Work life

(b) Quality Circle

(c) Alternative Work schedule

(d) Job Redesign

Page 42:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 41

9. What does SBU stand for :

(A) Single Business Unit

(b) Stratified Business Unit

(c) Strategic Business Unit

(d) None of the above.

10. Choose the best option that fits the meaning of the word ‘benchmarking’?

(a) Setting targets to be achieved.

(b) Setting goals and measuring performance

(c) Setting goals and measuring productivity based on the best industry practices

(d) All of the above.

11. Following are examples of the Macro environment ?

(a) Demographic environment

(b) Economic Environment

(c) Technological environment

(D) All of the above.

12. External information is more useful for........ managers :

(a) Top level.

(b) Middle level

(c) Lower level

(d) Link level

13. According to the........... approach, business should be conducted on the basis of established standards and

facts or truths gained through systematic observation, experiment and reasoning.

(a) Administrative.

(b) Behavioral

(c) Bureaucratic

Page 43:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 42

(d) Scientific

14. The two major managerial practices that emerged from Taylor’s approach to management are the

piece-rate incentive systems and............

(a) Time and motion study.

(b) Work-study.

(c) Fatigue.

(d) Organisation study.

(e) Unlike Classical theorists who viewed organisation from the production point of view, behaviour

theorists viewed it from the ......... point of view.

(a) Human.

(b) Technical.

(c) Administrative.

(d) Scientific..

(f) Cost leadership, differentiation and ............... are the three generic business level strategies identified by

Michael Porter.

(a) Growth.

(b) Market Leadership.

(c) Focus.

(d) Product leadership.

(g) In a SWOT analysis, a ..................... is regarded as an internal characteristics which can improve an

organisation’s competitive capabilities.

(a) Threat.

(b) Weaknesses.

(c) Strength.

(d) Opportunity.

Page 44:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 43

(h) The ............... level strategy identifies the business area that an organisation will operate in.

(a) Business.

(b) Functional.

(c) Corporate.

(d) Operational

(i) Which of the following is not an external threat to a company’s well being?

(a) Reduction in sales due to substitute products.

(b) Likely entry of new competitors.

(c) Underutilized plant capacity.

(d) Costly regulatory requirements.

(j) Which one of the following constitutes a threat to the company?

(a) Serving additional customer groups.

(b) Expanding the product line.

(c) Integrating forward or backward.

(d) Slowdown in market growth.

(k) Which of the following is not determined by organisational strategies?

(a) How centralised the decision making authority should be.

(b) How de-centralised the decision making authority should be.

(c) How the employees should be trained.

(d) How the staff positions should be designed.

(l) Which one of the following is not a social constraint?

(a) Changing lifestyles.

(b) Increasing number of women in the workforce.

Page 45:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 44

Domestic demand.

Increasing number of divorces.

(m) What role should a manager do when communicating with the outside world?

(a) Disseminator

(b) Spokesperson

(c) Recipient

(d) Liaison

Page 46:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 45

2 .1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Name : DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code : A70436

Class : IV B. Tech I Semester

Branch : ECE

Course Structure : Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits

4 - - 4

Year : 2018 – 2019

Course Faculty : Mr. Y. David Solomon Raju, Assoc. Prof, Dept of ECE,

Course Overview: It gives comprehensive study of basic Image fundamentals, types of Image Transforms,

properties of image transforms, Image Enhancement using spatial domain and Frequency

domain. Student will come to know how the spatial domain enhancement using

Histogram processing, Gray Level transformation median filtering and in the frequency

domain smoothing and sharpening of the filter. In Image Restoration, Image degradation

model, Image segmentation thresholding, Region oriented Segmentation. Image

Compression and wavelet based Image processing. Inverse Morphological image

processing Dilation and Erosion, opening and closing And finally filering Interactive

restoration.

2.2 PREREQUISITE(S):

Level Credits Periods /

Week

Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Knowledge of differential equations and integration,

Basics of Signals and Systems

Page 47:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 46

2.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks University End Exam Marks Total

Marks

There shall be two mid tem examinations. Each Mid-term

exam consists of subjective type and objective type

test. The subjective test is for 10 marks, with

duration of 1 hour. Subjective test of each semester

shall contain four questions; the student has to

answer two out of them. Each carrying 5 marks

The objective test paper Is prepared by JNTUH, which consists of 20 questions each carrying 0.5 marks and total of10 marks.

The student is assessed by giving two assignments,

one, after completion of

75 100

2.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No. Component Total Marks

1. I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

2. I Assignment - 05

3. II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

4. II Assignment - 05

5. External Examination 3 hours 75

Course Objectives:

1. Provide the student with the Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing.

2. Give the students a taste of the applications of the theories taught in the

subject. This will be achieved through the project and some selected lab

sessions.

3. Introduce the students to some advanced topics in digital image processing.

4. Give the students a useful skill base that would allow them to carry out

further study should they be interested and to work in the field.

5. Introduce the students to some advanced topics in digital image processing

Page 48:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 47

2.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

After completing this course the student must demonstrate the knowledge and ability to

1. Explain the basic elements and applications of image processing

2. Analyze image sampling and quantization requirements and implications

3. Design and implement two-dimensional spatial and frequency filters for image enhancement

4. Model the image restoration problem in both time and frequency domains

5. Explain the image segmentation and image compression problem

6. Develop Wavelet based applications

7. Illustrate Morphological image processing.

8. Be able to implement basic image processing algorithms in MATLAB.

9. Have the skill base to further explore advance of topics of digital image processing.

10. Be in a position to make a positive professional contribution in the fields of digital image

processing

2.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

s.No

OUTCOME

LEVEL PROFICIEN

CY

ASSESSED

BY

A An ability to apply knowledge of Science,

Mathematics, Engineering & Computing

fundamentals for the solutions of Complex

Engineering problems.

H Assignments

B An ability to identify, formulates, research literature and

analyze complex engineering problems using first

principles of mathematics and engineering sciences

H Exercises

C An ability to design solutions to complex process or program to meet desired needs N ----

D Ability to use research-based knowledge and research

methods including design of experiments to provide

valid conclusions

N ----

E An ability to use appropriate techniques, skills and tools

necessary for computing practice S

Seminar,

Discussions

Page 49:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 48

F Ability to apply reasoning informed by the

contextual knowledge to assess social issues,

consequences &

responsibilities relevant to the professional

engineering practice

H

Design

exercise,

Prototypes

G Ability to understand the impact of engineering solutions

in a global, economic, environmental, and societal

context with sustainability H

Exercise, Seminar,

Discussions

H An understanding of professional, ethical, social issues and responsibilities

S

Discussions

I An ability to function as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams and in multidisciplinary settings N ----

J An ability to communicate effectively on complex

engineering activities within the engineering

community

S

Seminar,

Discussions

K Ability to demonstrate and understanding of the

engineering and management principles as a member and

leader in a team

H

Workshops,

Prototypes

L

Ability to engage in independent and lifelong learning in

the context of technological change S

Seminar,

Discussions

M

An ability to design and implement projects in the areas

including Signal Processing, Microwaves, Communication

Systems, IC Technology and Embedded Systems.

H Mini and Micro

Projects

N

An ability to use knowledge in various domains to identify

research gaps and hence to provide solution to new ideas

and innovations.

S Seminars &

Projects

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Page 50:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 49

2.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT -I Digital Image fundamentals & Image Transforms: Digital Image fundamentals,

Sampling and quantization, Relationship between pixels, Image Transforms: 2-D

FFT, Properties, Walsh transform, Hadamard Transform, Discrete cosine Transform,

Haar transform, Slant transform, Hotelling transform

UNIT -II

Image Enhancement (Spatial Domain): Introduction, Image Enhancement in

spatial domain, Enhancement through point operation, Types of Point Operation,

Histogram Manipulation, Linear & Non - linear gray level transformation, Local or

neighborhood operation, median filter, spatial domain high pass filtering.

Image Enhancement (Frequency Domain): Filtering in frequency domain,

obtaining frequency domain filters from spatial filters, Generating filters directly in

the frequency domain, Low pass (smoothing) filters in frequency domain, High pass

(sharpening) filters in frequency domain

UNIT -III

Image Restoration: Degradation model, Algebraic approach to restoration,

Inverse filtering, least mean square filters, Constrained Least Squares

Restoration, Interactive Restoration

UNIT -IV Image segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, Edge linking and boundary

detection, Thresholding, Region oriented segmentation

Morphological Image Processing: Dilation and Erosion : Dilation, Structuring

Element Decomposition, The Strel function, Erosion, Combining Dilation and

Erosion, Opening and Closing, the hit or miss transformation, Overview of Digital

Image Watermarking Methods

UNIT –V

Image Compression: Redundancies and their removal methods, Fidelity criteria,

Image compression models, Source encoder and decoder, Error free compression,

Lossy compression, JPEG2000 Standards.

Page 51:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 50

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Digital Image Processing, Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, 3rdEdn, Pearson, 2008.

2. Digital Image Processing, S. Jayaraman, S. Esakkirajan, T. Veerakumar, TMH, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Digital Image Processing using MAT LAB, Rafael, C. Gonzalez, Richard E woods and

Stens L Eddings, 2nd Edn, TMH,2010

2. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, A.K. Jain, PHI, 1989

3. Digital Image Processing and Computer Vision, Somka, Hlavac, Boyle, Cengage

Learning (India Edition) 2008

4. Introductory Computer vision Imaging Techniques and Solutions, Adrain Low, 2Nd Edn, 2008

5. Introduction to Image Processing & Analysis – John C. Russ, J. Christian Russ, CRC Press,

2010

6. Wavelet Transforms (Introduction to theory and applications), Raghuveer M. Rao and

Ajit S. Bopardikar, Pearson, 2000

7. Digital image processing with matlab & labview – Vipula singh

2.8 COURSE PLAN:

Lecture

No. Course Learning

Outcomes

Topics to be covered Referenc

e 1-3 Outline what is an image and

what is an digital image processing

Introduction to Image Processing T1

4-5 Discuss various image fundamentals

Digital Image Fundamentals T1

6-7 Illustrate sampling and quantization

Sampling and Quantization T1

7-9 Relate relation between pixels Relationship between pixels T1

10-11 Explain 2Dd FFT properties 2-D FFT, Properties T1

12-13 Demonstrate various 2-D transforms

Walsh and Hadamard Transform, DCT, Haar transform, Slant transform,

Hotelling Transform

14 How to enhance image in spatial domain

Image Enhancement in Spatial Domain T1

Page 52:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 51

15-17 Classify enhancement processing techniques

Enhancement through point processing, Types of point processing

T1

18-20 Analyze histogram manipulation Histogram Manipulation T1

21-22 Demonstrate linear and non

linear transforms

Linear and non-linear gray level

transformation, local or neighbourhood operation

23-26 Illustrate filtering in spatial domain

Median filter processing. Spatial domain high pass filtering

T1

27-28 Illustrate filtering in

frequency domain

Filtering in frequency domain,

Obtaining frequency domain filters

from spatial filters

T1

29-30 Determine filters Generating filters directly in the frequency domain

T1

31-32 Illustrate LPF & HPF Low pass (smoothing) and High pass (sharpening) filters in Frequency domain.

T1

33-35 Build degradation model Degradation model, Algebraic approach to restoration, inverse filtering

T1

36-38 Model Least mean square filters Least mean square filters. Constrained Least square restoration

T1

39 Model Interactive restoration Interactive restoration T1

40-42 Determine edges and boundary Detection of discontinuities, Edge linking and boundary detection

T1

43-45 Design threshold models Threshold T1

46-47 Illustrate dilation Dilation, Structuring Element Decomposition

T1

48-50 Illustrate erosion the Strel function, Erosion T1

51-52 Examine Dilation and erosion Combining Dilation and Erosion: Opening and closing the hit and miss transformation

T1

53-55 Develop region segmentation Region oriented Segmentation T1

56-57 Classify various redundancies Redundancies and their removal methods, Fidelity criteria

T1

58-59 Categorize compression models Image compression models,

Source encoder and decoder

T1

60 Model Error free compression Error free compression T1

61 Model lossy compression Lossy Compression T1

Page 53:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 52

62 Summarize JPEG 2000 Standards

JPEG 2000 Standards T1

2.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE

ACHIEVEMENT THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Objectives

Program Outcomes Program Specific

Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N

1 H S H H S H S S S

2 H S H S S S S S

3 H H H S H S S S

4 H H S S S H S S S

5 H H H S H S S S

S – Supportive H - Highly Related

2.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcomes

Program Outcomes Program Specific Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N

1 H H S H H S S H S S S

2 H S S

3 H H S H H S S H S

4 H S H S S S

5 H H H S S S S S

6 H S H S S H

7 H H S H H H S S S

8 H H S S S S S

9 H H S H H H S

10 H S S S H S S

S – Supportive H - Highly Related

Page 54:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 53

2.11OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-I

1.Translation of the origin of the world co-ordinate system to the location of the gimbals center is accomplished by using the matrix

a. Identity b. transformation c. null d. transition

2. A counter clockwise rotation of the camera implies position angles, and 0

0 mark is z and _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ axes are aligned a. X b. Y c. Z d. R

3. Digitization of the spatial co-ordinates (x, y) called a. Gray level quantization b. finite sampling c. Image sampling d. image quantization

4. A 128 X 128 image with 64 gray levels requires _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ bits of

storage

a. 4096 b. 8192 c. 12288 d. 98304

3 4- neighbors of pixel p is a. (x+1, y) ( x, y+1) (x-1, y) ( x, y-1) b. (x, y) (x, y+1) (x+1, y+1) ( x, y-1) c. (x,y) ( x-1, y+1) (x+1, y+1) ( x, y-1) d. (x, y) ( x-1, y-1) ( x+1, y+1) ( x-1,y+1)

5. A 64 X 64 image with _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ gray levels requires 16,384 bits of storage a. 2

4

b. 28

c. 32 d. 64

6. A good image is difficult to define because image quality is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. high subjective, weakly dependent b. lowly subjective, weakly dependent c. high subjective, strongly dependent d. lowly subjective, strongly dependent

7. Fine sampling is required in the neighborhood of sharp _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ transition a. High level b. low level

Page 55:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 54

c. medium level d. gray-level

8. The 4- diagonal neighbors of p have coordinate

[02S03] a. (x+1, y), ( x+1, y+1), (x-1, y+1),( x-1,

y-1)

b. (x, y),( x+1, y-1),(x-1, y+1),( x-1, y-11)

c. (x+1, y+1),( x+1, y-1),(x-1, y+1),( x-1, y-1)

d. (x+1, y+1),( x, y),(x-1, y+1),( x-1, y-1)

9. Connectivity is used to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of objects and components of regions in an

image

a. Establishing boundaries

b. destroy boundaries

c. Find boundaries

d. change boundaries

10. For coordinate p(3,4) the 4- diagonal neighbors of p are _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _

a. ( 3, 4) ( 4, 8) ( 3, 1) ( 2, 2)

b. ( 4, 3) ( 4, 2) ( 2,5) ( 2, 3)

c. ( 4 , 5) (4, 3) ( 2, 5) ( 2, 3)

d. ( 3, 5) ( 3, 3) ( 2, 5) ( 2, 3)

12. De(p,q)=[(x-s)2+(y-t)

2]

1/2 is the Euclidean _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ between _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. distance and p

b. speed ,p and q

c. speed, q and p

d. distance, p and q

The Euclidean distance between p and q is defined as

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ a. De(p,q)=[(x-s)+(y-t)

2]

1/2

b. De(p,q)=[(x-s)2+(y-t)]

1/2

c. De(p,q)=[(x-s)2+(y-t)

2]

2

d. De(p,q)=[(x-s)2+(y-t)

2]

1/2

13.The city-block distance between p and q is defined as

a. D4(p,q)=[|x-s|+|y-t|]1/2

b. D4(p,q)=[|x-s|+|y-t|]2

c.

D4

(p,q)=

[|x-

s|+|y-

t|]3 d.

D4(p,q

)=|x-

s|+|y-t|

13 .D4 distance is also called as

a. city-block distance

b. chess-board distance

c. Euclidean - distance

Page 56:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 55

d. mean- distance

14. The chess - board distance between p and q is defined as

a. D8(p,q) = min(|x-s|,|y-t|)

b. D8(p,q) = max(|x-s|,|y-t|)

c. D8(p,q) = max(|x+s|,|y-t|)

d. D8(p,q) = max(|x-s|,|y+t|)

14. The principle logic operations used in an image processing are

a. AND,OR, compliment

b. greater, lesser

c. greater, over

d. less than or equal

15. D8 distance is also called as

a. city-block distance

b. chess-board distance

c. Euclidean - distance d. mean- distance

16. The principle uses of image multiplication is to correct

a. gray-level shading

b. noise reduction

c. medical-imaging

d. noise level shading

17. Logic operations apply to

a. binary image

b. multivolume pixels

c. unary image

d. ternary image

18. Arithmetic - logic units in modern image processors are used to perform arithmetic &

logic operations in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. sequentially

b. parallel

c. randomly

d. Serial

19. Arithmetic operation apply to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. binary image

b. multivolume pixels

c. unary image

d. ternary image

20. Logic operation are basic tools in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ processing

a. color image

b. digital image

c. signal d. Binary image

21. Logic operation are basic _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in Binary image processing

a. medical operations

Page 57:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 56

b. digital analog c. signal

22. The Discrete Fourier transfer function is a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ function

a. continuous

b. discrete

c. discontinuous

d. loop

23. The DFT function for x=0,1,2,N then the , , , , , , , , , , , , , , is 1/NΔx

a. b. ΔN c. Δx

d. Δx/N

24. The Separability property is obtained by successive applications of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. 1-DFT or its inverse

b. 2-DFT or its inverse

c. 3-DFT or its inverse

d. any DFT

25. In the translation property , the visual examination of transform is usually limited to display

of its _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. angle

b. magnitude

c. volume

d. area

26. The average value of the 2-D discrete function is ----------------------

27. The Laplacion of two variable function f(x,y) defined as ------------------

28. Consider 2-FT relationships that constitute a basic link between the

spatial and frequency domains. These relationships called _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. correlation, spatial convolution

b. convolution, correlation

c. spatial convolution, spatial correlation

d. spatial correlation, spatial convolution

29. f1

(x, y) = 1?N2 f(x,y) is the average value of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ discrete function is

a. 2-D

b. 3-D

c. 1-D d. n-D

30. The DFT and its _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ are periodic with period N

a. equal

b. Inverse

c. proportional

d. not have any relation

Page 58:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 57

31. In the periodicity properties of the FT , Fourier spectrum shows _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ periods in interval [ 0, n-1]

a. back-to-back half

b. back-to-back-full

c. back-to-back double

d. back-to-back triple

32. In the periodicity properties of FT , the shifted spectrum showing a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

period in the same interval

a. full

b. half

c. double

d. terrible

33. Whittaker-Shanoy sour lining theorem'' is a complete recovery of band - limited

function from samples where spacing satisfies --------------------

34. Application correlation in Image processing is

a. prototype matching, closest match between unknown image and known image

b. prototype matching, no match between unknown image and known image

c. prototype matching, closest match between unknown image and prototype image

d. match between similar image 35. Sampling can represented by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ an Impulse train with the

function of interest

a. multiplying

b. differentiating

c. integrating

d. dividing

36. The array formed by Walsh transformation kernel is a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ matrix

having _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ rows and columns

a. symmetric, orthogonal

b. asymmetric, orthogonal

c. symmetric, polygonal d. asymmetric, polygonal

37. The elements of hadmard matrix are derived from the

a. kernel values

b. by normalizing the hadmard matrix

c. sequence of that hadmard columns

d. sequence of that hadmard rows

38. The DFT is that function f(x) is discredited into a sequence by taking 'N' sample units

apart

a. x - Δ x

b. Δ x

c. x+Δ x d. x

39. The DFT function for x=0,1,2, N then the is

a. 1/ NΔx

b. x1/Δx

c. NΔx d. x

Page 59:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 58

40. Basic transformations are developed to overcome the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ problems

a. image rotation, image scaling, image translation

b. image acquisition, image translation

c. image transition, image rotation

d. image detection, image translation

UNIT-II

1. In addition to pixel by pixel processing an entire images, arithmetic and logical operations

are used in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ operations

1. adjacent-oriented

2. connected oriented

3. Neighborhood oriented

4. control oriented

2. The shape and meaning of the histogram are not affected by the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ readings axis

origin

horizontal axis

vertical axis

3. To rotate a point about another arbitrary point in space requires _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ number of transformations

1

2

3

4

4. Histogram processing P(rk) gives an estimate of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of gray level rk probability of occurrence

probability of failure

probability of coincidence

probability of mutual exclusion

5. A plot of histogram processing P(rk)function all values of K provides a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

_ _ description of the appearance image normal

global

local

formal

6. The image enhancement techniques by considering processing methods that are bagged

only on the intensity of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pixels single

double

half

Tribute

7. The idea behind contrast stretching is to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ dynamic range of gray levels

in image processing increase

decrease

neither increase nor decrease

no change

8. Histogram transformation function is also called as

histogram equalization

Page 60:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 59

histogram computation

histogram quantization

histogram non equalization

9. In the local histogram processing, only one new row or column of neighborhood

changes during a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ translation of the region column to row

pixel to row

column to pixel

pixel to pixel

10. Updating the histogram obtained in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ introduced at each motion

step is possible present location with old data

previous location with old data

previous location with new data

present location with new data

11. The advantage of histogram equalization over manual contrast manipulation techniques is

that the former is Partially automatic

partially manual

fully automatic

fully manual

12. The local histogram processing is advantage over computing the histogram over all pixels

in the neighborhood region each time the region moved _ pixel

location 1

2

3

4

13. The undesirable checker board effect is produced when reduce the computation is to utilize_______Regions

non overlapping

overlapping

opposite

nearest

14. The measure of average brightness and variance is measure of

contrast

intensity

image processing

local enhancement

15. The histogram specification, the desired image levels could be equalized by the

transformation function is ------------------

If an noisy image g(x,y) is formed by using M different noisy images, the g(x,y) is ----

---

16. The spatial filtering is opposed to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ filtering using the Fourier

transform

time- domain frequency domain

Page 61:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 60

complex-domain

minimal-domain

17. Low contrast images can result from poor illumination, wrong setting of aperture

wrong setting of aperture , lack of dynamic range in the imaging sensor

wrong setting of aperture, poor illumination

poor illumination, wrong setting of aperture, lack of dynamic range

in the imaging sensor

18. The method of histogram specification function involves _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

transformation functions. 1

2

3

4

19. An effective way to compress the dynamic range of pixel values to perform the

following intensity transformation is useful ---------------------

20. The condition , 0 <=T( r) <=1 for 0 <=r<=1 guarantees a mapping that is consistent with the allowed range of pixel values

preserves the order from black to white in the gray value

guarantees a mapping that is inconsistent with the allowed range of pixel values

the order from white to black in the gray value

21.P( r)=probability density function with r levels=-2r+2 0 <=r <=1 0 elsewhere

probability density function of 's' in the 0<=s<=1 range given by

-1

-1

0

-2

22. Disadvantage of histogram equalization over histogram on specification is

fully automatic

does not lend itself to interactive image enhancement applications

flexible

lend itself to interactive image enhancement applications

23. Median filters are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

linear

nonlinear

active

passive

24.The image differentiation magnitude to (mag) given by ------------------

If noise pattern consists of strong spike like components which filter is used

median filter

low pass spatial filtering

neighborhood averaging method

high pass spatial filtering

25. If member of gray levels are 16 and with 256 samples true then number of bits

required

Page 62:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 61

. 256* 256* 16 b. 256* 128* 16 c. 256* 8* 128 d. 128* 128* 32

26.Low pass spatial filter have

a. +ve coefficients b -ve coefficients

c neutral

d no coefficients

27.Low pass spatial filters also called

A neighborhood averaging method

B median filter

C general method

D butter worth

28.High pass filters are attenuate or eliminate

A high frequency components

B low frequency components

C no frequency

D any frequency components

29.Low pass filters are attenuate or eliminate

A high frequency components

B low frequency components

C no frequency

D any frequency components

30.The different noisy images are increases the viability of the pixel values of each

location (x,y)

a increases

b increase and then decreases

c decreases and the increases

d decreases

22 The principal objective of sharpening is _ _ _ _ __ _ live defining in an image

Neglect

a. highlight

b. weakening

c. strengthen

23. The method which is one of the basic tools function image processing

applications in printing and publishing industry

Page 63:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 62

a. sharp marking

b. unsharp marking

c. spatial marking

d. gradient marking

24. The transfer function of BLPE of order n and with cut off frequency locus at

difference do from origin is defined by

a. H( mu,v)=1/[1+h(D(u,v)/D_0)n]

b. H( mu,v)=1/[1+h(D(u,v)/D_0)2]

25. High pass spatial files eliminates the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ term

a. zero-frequency

b. high-boost-frequency

c. average-frequency

d. low frequency

26. Enhancement frequency domain is compute the furies Henry

function of image and multiply the result by fitters transfer function and

take _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ the produce enhanced image

a. Fourier transfer

b. inverse transfer

c. belies transfer

d. laplace

27. For an ideal low pass filter career section, the point of transition between

H(u,v)=1 and H(u,v)=0 often called

a. saturated frequency

b. cut in frequency

c. cut off frequency

d. unsaturated frequency

Page 64:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 63

28. Redirecting the average value of an image to zero implies that the image must have some _ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ levels

a. negative gray

b. positive gray

c. zero gray

d. infinite

29. Unsharp marking is the process of a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ blurred image from original

a. adding

b. multiplying

c. subtracting

d. dividing

30. The blessing is achieved in frequency domain by attenuating or specified range of components

function transform of given image

a. high frequency

b. low frequency

c. bond frequency

d. in equal frequency

31. The flitter transfer function that affect the real and imaginary parts of Fourier transform of

image to be smoothed in exactly the same manner. The flitters referred as

a. zero-phase shift filters

b. 30-phase shift filters

c. 60-phase shift filters

d. 90-phase shift filters

32. In ideal filters indicates all frequencies out side the circle are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

a. No attenuation

b. complete attenuated

c. partially attenuated

d. varies attenuatio

Page 65:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 64

34 The high pass filtering process attenuates the components without disturbing

e. low frequency, high frequency

f. High frequency, low frequency

g. low frequency, low frequency h. high frequency, high frequency

33. The image sharpening can be achieved in frequency domain by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ process

a. low pass filtering

b. high pass filtering

c. butter worth filtering

d. low pass and high pass

34. Ideal high pass filter is completely opposite to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ filters

a. ideal low pass

b. ideal butter worth

c. ideal band pass d. any ideal filters

35. In the enhancement in the frequency domain we compute _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the image

to be enhanced

a. integral

b. Fourier transformation

c. differential d. lap lace transformation

36. The zero phase shift filters are

a. radically asymmetric

b. uniformly asymmetric

c. radically symmetric

d. uniformly symmetric 37. In the enhancement in the frequency domain we perform _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ transform to

produce the enhanced image

a. inverse

b. Fourier

c. Laplace

d. differential

38. The _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ distance between p and q is defined as

a. hexagon

b. general

c. Euclidean

d. hypothetical

39. The final histogram with significant _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ corresponding to an image with

high contrast [20S04]

a. speed

b. volume

c. area d. value

Page 66:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 65

40. The _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ property is obtained by successive applications of 1-DFT or its

inverse.

a. Separability

b. Normalization

c. unique

d. non separable

41. Lowpass filter transfer function of n order is given by H(u,v)= cutoff frequency locus at a

distance of D0 from

a. 1/1-[D(u,v)/DO]2n

b. 1/1+[D(u,v)/DO]2n

c. 1/1+[D(u,v)/DO]n

d. 1/1-[D(u,v)/DO]n

UNIT-III

1. The number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space is called

a. picture depth

b. picture length

c. pixel depth

d. pixel length

2. A color attribute that describes a pure color

a. hue

b. saturation

c. brightness

d. luminance

3. The amounts of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color are called

a. composite value

b. luminance value

c. tristimulus value

d. chromaticity value

4. A model that decouples the color and gray scale information in an image, making it suitable

for many of the gray scale technique

a. CMYK model

b. HSI model

c. RGB model

d. CMY model

Page 67:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 66

5. A model in which each color appears in its primary spectral components of red, green and blue

a. HSI model

b. RGB models

c. CMY models

d. CMYK model

6. The total amount of energy that flows from the light source and it is usually measured in watt

a. brightness

b. luminance

c. radiance

d. chromaticity

7. A measure of the amount of energy an observer perceives from a light source measured in

lumens

a. brightness

b. luminance

c. radiance

d. chromaticity

8. The sensors in the eye responsible for color vision

a. cones

b. rods

c. retina

d. lens

9. The characteristics generally used to distinguish one color from another are

a. brightness , hue

b. hue, brightness

c. saturation, hue

d. saturation, hue and brightness

10. Hue and Saturation taken together are called

a. brightness

b. luminance

c. radiance

d. chromaticity

11. An approach to perform three independent transformations on the gray level of an input pixel

is frequently used by

a. single spectral image processing

b. multi level image processing

c. multi level and multi spectral image processing

d. multi spectral image processing

12. In gray level to color transformation, if all three transformation have the same phase and

frequency the output image will be

a. pseudo color

b. color

c. monochrome

d. binary

13. Gray scale is divided in to intervals and a different color was assign to each region with out

regard for the meaning of the gray levels of the image

a. intensity slicing

Page 68:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 67

b. neither intensity slicing nor color coding

c. intensity slicing and color coding

d. color coding

14. A powerful aid in visualization, if numerous images are involved and the exact values of gray

levels are known

a. color coding

b. intensity slicing

c. neither intensity slicing nor color coding

d. intensity slicing and color coding

15. An approach that perform three independent transformations on the gray level of an input pixel

and then fed separately in to the red, green and blue channels

a. color coding

b. intensity slicing

c. gray level to color transformation

d. gray to binary transformation

16. A measure of the degree to which a pure color is diluted by white light

a. brightness

b. luminance

c. saturation

d. hue

17. The hue, saturation and intensity values required to form the HSI space can be obtained from

the

a. HSI color cube

b. RGB color cube

c. CMY color cube

d. CMYK color cube 18. An example of pseudo color image processing

a. intensity slicing

b. color coding

c. neither intensity slicing nor color coding

d. intensity slicing and color coding

19. If an image is interpreted as a 3-D function the method can be viewed as one of placing planes

parallel to the coordinate plane of the image: each plane then slices the function in the area of

intersection

a. color coding

b. intensity slicing

c. neither intensity slicing nor color coding

d. intensity slicing and color coding 20. In terms of digital image processing the hardware oriented models most commonly used in

practice

a. HSI model

b. CMYK model

c. RGB model

d. CMY model

21. A subjective descriptor that is particularly impossible to measure

a. saturation

b. brightness

c. luminance

d. radiance

22. CIE stands for

a. Certified internet engineer

b. Collaborative information environment

Page 69:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 68

c. Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage

d. Commission for illumination and emission 23. A proper combination of the three pigment primary or secondary with its opposite primary

produces

a. cyan

b. black

c. white

d. yellow 24. The use of color image processing is motivated because

a. color is a powerful descriptor

b. human can discern thousands of colors

c. human brain can perceive colors easily d. color is a powerful descriptor and human can discern thousands of colors

25. The problem of assigning a color to a particular monochrome intensity or range of intensities

a. monochrome image processing

b. binary image processing

c. pseudo color processing

d. full color processing

26. The quantities used to describe the quality of a chromatic light source

a. radiance, luminance and brightness

b. radiance

c. luminance

d. brightness

27. In HSI component image to change the individual color of any region in the RGB image, we

change the values of corresponding region in the

a. intensity image

b. saturation image

c. hue image

d. binary image

28. A color model that decouples the intensity component from the color carrying information in a

color image

a. RGB color model

b. HIS color model

c. CMY color model

d. CMYK color model

29. A color model ideal for image color generation but its use for color description is much more

limited

a. CMY color model

b. HSI color model

c. RGB color model

d. CMY, RGB and HSI models

30. An attribute associated with the dominant wavelength in a mixture of light waves

a. brightness

b. saturation

c. hue

d. luminance

Page 70:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 69

31. An operator having the input- output relationship g(x, y)=H[f(x, y)]if expressed as H[f(x-α, y-

β)]=g(x-α, y-β))

a. position invariant b. additive

c. homogeneity

d. linear

32. The linear image restoration is frequently signified by

a. blind deconvolution

b. image convolution

c. blind convolution

d. image deconvolution

33. If H is a linear position-invariant process, then G(U, V) = H(U, V)* F(U, V)+N(U, V)

a. degraded image in spatial domain

b. degraded image in frequency domain

c. enhancement in frequency domain

d. enhancement in frequency domain

34. In the expression H [f1(x,y)+f2(x,y)] = H[f1(x,y)]+H[f2(x,y)]

a. linear

b. additive

c. linear, additive ,homogeneity

d. homogeneity

35. In the expression H [ af1(x,y)+bf2(x,y)] = aH[f1(x,y)]+bH[f2(x,y)]

a. linear

b. additive

c. linear, additive ,homogeneity d. homogeneity

36. In the expression H[af1(x,y)]=aH[f2(x,y)], H obeys the property of

a. linear

b. additive

c. linear, additive ,homogeneity

d. homogeneity

37. A process to reconstruct or recover an image that has been degraded by using a priori

knowledge of the degradation phenomenon

a. restoration and enhancement

b. neither restoration nor enhancement

c. restoration

d. enhancement

38. The process of estimating the original image, from the degraded image with some knowledge

about the degradation function and some knowledge about the additive noise

a. enhancement

b. degradation

c. segmentation

d. restoration

39. The degradation function H is

a. linear

b. position invariant

c. homogeneity

Page 71:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 70

d. linear, position invariant and homogeneity

40. If H is a linear position-invariant process, then G(U, V) = H(U, V)* F(U, V)+N(U, V) [06S04]

a. degraded image in spatial domain

b. degraded image in frequency domain

c. enhancement in frequency domain

d. enhancement in spatial domain

41. Restoration filter that assumes that degradation was caused by a linear function

a. blind deconvolution

b. inverse filtering

c. geometric filtering d. mean filtering

42. Restoration filter that gives an estimate of the original uncorrupted image with minimal mean

square error

a. wiener filtering

b. inverse filtering

c. geometric filtering

d. mean filtering

43. In the restoration process the filter in which the power spectra of the un degraded image and

noise must be known

a. inverse filtering

b. both inverse filtering and wiener filtering

c. wiener filtering

d. mean filtering

44. The restoration process in which the knowledge of mean and variance of the noise are known

a. wiener filtering

b. inverse filtering

c. constrained least square filtering

d. mean filtering

45. The restoration filter which uses the Laplacian to alleviate the noise

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. inverse filtering

d. mean filterin

46. The filters used in the restoration process are often called

a. blind filter

b. deconvolution filter

c. restoration filter

d. convolution filter

47. The process of restoring an image by using a degradation function that has been estimated in

some way sometimes is called

a. blind convolution

b. image convolution

c. blind deconvolution

d. image deconvolution

48. A restoration process where we compute an estimate F(U, V) of the transform of the original

Page 72:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 71

image simply by dividing the transform of the degraded image G(U, V), by the degradation

function

a. wiener filtering

b. inverse filtering

c. constrained least squares filtering

d. mean filtering

49. The inverse filtering approach has a disadvantage that it makes no explicit provision for

handling

a. ratio of power spectra should be known b. restrict difference between blurred image and blurred version of the reconstructed

image

c. restrict the smoothness in restored image

d. noise

50. The image restoration obtained by the equation

a. inverse filtering

b. wiener filtering

c. constrained least square filtering d. mean filtering

51. The filter which yields better results for the high and medium noise case

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. inverse filtering d. mean filtering

52. If the noise in the wiener is zero then the wiener filter reduces to

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. inverse filtering d. mean filtering

53. Developing effect of the wiener filter dimishes rapidly as noise level

a. non increasing

b. decreases

c. increases

d. non decreasing

54. A method aim to suppress degradation using knowledge about its nature

a. restoration and enhancement

b. neither restoration nor enhancement

c. enhancement

d. restoration

55. Methods based on deconvolution applied globally to the entire image

a. restoration and enhancement

b. neither restoration nor enhancement

c. restoration

d. enhancement

Page 73:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 72

56. When both noise and blur are presented the filter that achieves a compromise between the low

pass noise smoothing filter and high pass inverse filter

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. mean filtering

d. inverse filtering

57. Filter used when little is known about the statistical properties of the observed image

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. mean filtering

d. inverse filtering

58. The filter which is unstable

a. wiener filtering

b. constrained least square filtering

c. mean filtering

d. inverse filtering

59. In the presence of additive noise the inverse filter output can be written as

a. F(U,V)+( N(U,V)/H(U,V) )

b. F(U,V)-( N(U,V)/H(U,V) )

c. N(U,V)/H(U,V)

d. (F(U,V)+ N(U,V))/H(U,V)

UNIT-IV

1. Image segmentation generally are based on one of the two basic properties of intensity values

a. continuity and dissimilarity

b. discontinuity and similarity

c. discontinuity and dissimilarity

d. continuity and similarity 2. In the detection of isolated points in an image the mask coefficients sum to zero, indicating

that the mask response will be

a. non zero in area of constant gray level

b. should have +ve value in area of constant gray level

c. should have -ve value in area of constant gray level d. zero in area of contrast gray level

3. Let R1, R2, R3 and R4 denotes the response of the mask for horizontal, +45o, vertical and -45

o

respectively. If at a point in the image |R1| > | Rj| for j=2,3,4 that particular point is said to be

more likely associated with a

a. line oriented at -45o

b. horizontal line

c. vertical line

d. line oriented at 45o

4. The first derivative can be used to detect the presence of an

a. double edges in an image

b. noise in an image

c. edge at a point

d. edge pixel on the dark or light side

5. The zero crossing property of the second derivative is useful for locating

Page 74:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 73

a. the centers of the thick edges

b. magnitude of the gradient

c. direction of the gradient vector

d. constant area in the derivative image

6. A multi level thresholding classifies a point (x, y) as belonging to an object class by using

a. single threshold

b. multi spectral threshold

c. single spectral threshold

d. multiple threshold

7. In the case of global thresholding the threshold depends on

a. local property P(x, y)

b. F(x, y)

c. F(x, y) and local property P(x, y)

d. F(x, y) and the spatial coordinates x and y

8. The hough transform is applicable to find

a. circle

b. any geometric shape

c. line

d. rectangle

9. In global threshold segmentation is accomplished by scanning the image pixel by pixel and

labeling each pixel as object or background , depending on whether the gray level of that pixel

is greater or less than the value of

a. single global threshold

b. the spatial coordinates x and y

c. single global threshold and the spatial coordinates x and y

d. local property P(x, y)

10. The threshold used for each pixel depends on the location of the pixel in terms of the sub

images, this type of thresholding is

a. optimal thresholding

b. global thresholding

c. adaptive thresholding

d. local thresholding

11. An histogram which is less dependent on the relative size of the objects and the background

can be obtained by using

a. optimal thresholding

b. boundary characteristics

c. global thresholding

d. adaptive thresholding

12. A method for estimating thresholds that produce the minimum average segmentation error

a. adaptive thresholding

b. boundary characteristics

c. optimal thresholding

d. global thresholding

13. In the region split and merge the split in to four disjoint quadrants of any region Ri is done if

a. Ri is not connected

b. P(Ri)=true

Page 75:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 74

c. P(Ri)= false

d. Ri is connected

14. In the region split and merge the merge any adjacent regions Rj and Rk if

a. P(Ri U Rk)= false

b. P(Ri U Rk)=true

c. P(Ri) =true

d. P(Ri) =false

15. An approach to sub divide an image initially in to a set of arbitrary, disjointed regions and then

merge and/or split the regions

a. edge detection

b. region splitting and merging

c. region growing

d. thresholding

16. The splitting technique used in region splitting and merging has a convenient representation

a. split tree

b. pyramid

c. spanning tree

d. quad tree

17. In the region splitting and merging

a. only splitting is performed

b. merging and splitting are simultaneously done

c. splitting are done first

d. merging done first

18. A procedure that groups pixels or sub regions in to larger regions based on predefined criteria

a. edge detection

b. merge and split

c. thresholding

d. region growing

19. The approach in which a set of seed points are identified and from these grow regions by

appending to each seed those neighboring pixels that have properties similar to the seed

a. merge and split

b. region growing

c. threshold

d. edge detection

20. Basic problem in region growing segmentation is

a. selecting a set of seed points

b. formulation of a stopping rule

c. selecting a set of seed points and formulation of a stopping rule d. to calculate the similarity properties

21. Selecting a set of one or more starting can be based on

a. nature of the problem

b. type of image

c. size of the image

d. nature of the problem and type of image

22. Region growing should stop when no more pixel satisfy the criteria for inclusion in that region,

Page 76:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 75

these criteria's are

a. gray level and texture

b. texture and color

c. gray level, texture, color

d. gray level and color

23. Segmentation problems requiring multiple thresholds are best solved using

a. optimal thresholding

b. region growing method

c. region split and merge

d. adaptive thresholding

24. The basic problem with use of boundary characteristics for histogram improvement and local

thresholding

a. peaks are tall and narrow

b. histogram is independent of image and background

c. implicit assumption that edges between object and background are to be known

d. histogram is uni modal

UNIT-V

1. The process of removing the inter pixel redundancies in an image

a. quantization

b. mapping

c. coding

d. naming

2. The eye does not respond with equal sensitivity to all visual information , some information

which has less relative important is known as

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

3. Redundancy which relates directly to the inter pixel correlations with in an image

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy 4. Redundancies which result from the structural or geometric relationships between the objects

in the image [16M02]

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

5. Inter pixel redundancies can be named as

a. spatial redundancy

b. geometric redundancy

c. inter frame redundancy

d. spatial, geometric and inter frame redundancy

6. Image compression addresses the problem of reducing the amount of data by removing

a. Error data

b. Noisy data

Page 77:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 76

c. Redundant data

d. Redundant and Noisy data

7. In digital image compression, data redundancies identified are

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

8. The construction of codes to reduce the amount of data used to represent it

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

9. Assigning fewer bits to the more probable gray level than to the less probable ones to achieve

data compression

a. Fixed length coding

b. Hexadecimal coding

c. Variable length coding

d. Natural binary coding

10. The probability of gray levels are used to remove the redundancy

a. Inter pixel redundancy

b. Coding redundancy

c. Psycho visual redundancy

d. Coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

11. Hamming code corrects

a. any no. of bit error

b. two bit error

c. single bit error

d. three bit error

12. Hamming code is

a. error detection code

b. error correction code

c. error detection and correction code

d. neither error detecting nor error correcting code

13. The source encoder is responsible for reducing or eliminating

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

14. In the general source decoder the redundancies which are not included

a. inverse quantization

b. symbol decoder

c. inverse mapper

d. symbol encoder

15. The channel encoder and decoder uses

a. Huffman code

Page 78:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 77

b. hamming code

c. arithmetic code

d. Huffman, hamming and arithmetic codes

16. The process of removing the psycho visual redundancy in an image

a. quantization

b. mapping

c. coding

d. naming

17. Removal of redundant data results in a loss of quantitative information is

a. coding redundancy

b. inter pixel redundancy

c. psycho visual redundancy

d. coding, inter pixel and psycho visual redundancy

18. When the level of information loss can be expressed as a function of the original or input

image and the compressed and sub sequentially decompressed output is called as

a. objective and subjective fidelity criterion

b. objective fidelity criterion

c. subjective fidelity criterion

d. error fidelity criterion

19. The evaluation may be made using an absolute rating scale or by means of side by side

comparison of image and decompressed image

a. objective and subjective fidelity criterion

b. objective fidelity criterion

c. subjective fidelity criterion d. error fidelity criterion

20. Measuring the image quality by the subjective evaluation of a human observer

a. objective and subjective fidelity criterion

b. objective fidelity criterion

c. subjective fidelity criterion

d. error fidelity criterion

2.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

OBJECTIVES:

The objectives of the course are to:

11. Provide the student with the fundamentals of digital image processing.

12. Give the students a taste of the applications of the theories taught in the subject. This will be

achieved through the project and some selected lab sessions.

13. Introduce the students to some advanced topics in digital image processing.

14. Give the students a useful skill base that would allow them to carry out further study should

they be interested and to work in the field.

Page 79:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 78

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial– I

1

The term Monochrome image or simply image refers to a

two- dimensional light intensity function f(x,y), where x,y

are spatial

coordinates and f is proportional to the brightness.

Level1

1

2 Digital Image processing encompasses a broad range of hardware,

software and theoretical underpinnings. Level 2 2

3

A common measure of transmission for digital data is the baud

rate, defined as the number of bits transmitted per second.

Generally, transmission is accomplished in pockets consisting

of starting bit, a byte of information, and a stop bit. Using this

approach, answer the following.

(a) How many minutes would it take to transmit a 512×512

image with 256 grey levels at 300baud?

(b) What would the time be at 9600 baud?

Level 3

1

4 Transform theory has played a key role in image processing for

many years and it continues to be a topic of interest in theoretical

as well as applied work in this field.

Level 2

5 Although we discuss other transforms, we emphasize on the

Fourier transform because of its wide applications in image

processing problems

Level 3

6 N log2N additions and 1/2 N log2N multiplications are needed to

compute the FFT of N points. How many additions and

multiplications require to compute the 2- D FFT of an NXN

image.

Leve l3

7 State and prove separability property of 2D-DFT. Level 4

S

.

N

o

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial– II

Page 80:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 79

1 The principal objectives of enhancement techniques is to

process an image so that the result is more suitable than the

original image for a specific application. The spatial domain

refers to image plane itself.

Level2

6

2

Frequency domain processing techniques are based on

modifying the Fourier transform of an image. Enhancement

techniques based on various combinations of methods from

these two categories are not Unusual

Level2

6

3 Discuss and explain why the discrete histogram equalization

technique will not in general yield a flat histogram. Level2 6

4 Discuss following histogram techniques for Image enhancement. (a) Histogram specification. (b) Local enhancement.

Level2 6

5 (a) Explain about Histogram specification with necessary

derivations (b) What is meant by local enhancement? Discuss its importance

Level2 6

6

Enhancement in the frequency domain in principle is

straightforward. We simply compute the Fourier transform of

image to be enhanced, multiply the result by a filter transfer

function, and take the inverse transform to produce the

enhanced image.

Level2

2

7

Understanding of frequency domain concepts is essential to

the solution of many problems not easily addressable by

spatial techniques.

Level2

2

8 Sketch perspective plot of an 2-D Ideal High pass filter transfer

function and filter cross section and explain its usefulness in

Image enhancement.

Level2

2

9 Show that a high pass-filtered image in the frequency domain

can be obtained by using the method of subtracting a low pass

filtered image from the original.

Level4

2

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial– III

1

The ultimate goal of restoration techniques is to improve an image

in some sense. The restoration techniques are oriented toward

modeling the degradation and applying the inverse process in order

to recover the original image.

Level3

5

2 Early techniques for digital image restoration were derived

from frequency domain concepts. Level2 5

3 Explain about Iterative Nonlinear Restoration Using the

Lucy- Richardson Algorithm. Level2 5

Page 81:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 80

UNIT-III AND UNIT-IV :

4 Explain in detail the interactive restoration of an image Level2 5

5 Write a brief notes on Inverse filtering.

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial– IV

1

Segmentation subdivides an image into its constituent parts or

objects. The level to which this subdivision is carried depends

on the problem being solved. i.e segmentation should stop when

the objects of interest in an application have been isolated.

Level2

5

2 Autonomous segmentation is one of the most difficult tasks in

image processing. Effective segmentation rarely fails to lead

to a successful solution.

Level2

5

3 Write about various edge Detectors available in function edge 5

4 What is meant by image segmentations? Discuss various applications

of it. Level3 5

5 Explain the significance of thresholding in image segmentation. Level2 5

Page 82:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 81

UNIT-V

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial– V

1

Image compression address the problem of reducing the

amount of data required to represent a digital image. The

underlying basis of the reduction process is the removal of the

redundant data. From mathematical point of view, this

amounts to transforming a 2-D pixel

array into statistically uncorrelated data set.

Level2

5

2 The compressed image is decompressed to reconstruct the

original image or an approximation to it.

Level1 5

3 Explain about the following: (a) Lossy compression (b) Lossy

predictive coding

Level2 5

4 With a neat diagram explain in detail a general image

compression system model.

Level2 5

5 With a neat diagram explain the lossy predictive coding model. Level1 5

Page 83:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 80

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment–I

1 (a) Explain the process of Image acquisition.

(b) Discuss different elements used in digital image processing

system

Level1 1

2

(a) Explain the process of Image acquisition.

(b) Discuss different elements used in digital image

processing system.

Level2

1

3

A common measure of transmission for digital data is the baud

rate, defined as the number of bits transmitted per second.

Generally, transmission is accomplished in pockets consisting of

starting bit, a byte of information, and a stop bit. Using this

approach, answer the following.

(a) How many minutes would it take to transmit a 512×512

image with 256 grey levels at 300baud?

(b) What would the time be at 9600 baud?

(c) Repeat (a) and (b) for a 1024×1024 image 256 grey levels.

Level1

1

4

(a) Distinguish between uniform sampling and non uniform

sampling with respect to Images.

(b) What are the advantages of non uniform sampling.

Level2

1

5 Give the expressions for 1D and 2D kernels of Hadamard transform,

also give the transform expressions. Level2 3

6 (a) Find Fourier transform 2 -D sinusoidal function n(x,y) = A

sin(u0x

+ v0y), (b) Obtain the spectrum in above case.

Level4 3

7 Obtain Haar transform matrix for N=8. Level3 3

8

N log2N additions and 1/2 N log2N multiplications are needed to

compute the FFT of N points. How many additions and

multiplications require to compute the 2- D FFT of an NXN image

Level3

3

Page 84:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 81

2.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment–II

1 Discuss the concept of derivative filters? How they are used in Image enhancement?

Level2 6

2 Discuss following histogram techniques for Image

enhancement.

(a) Histogram specification. (b) Local enhancement.

Level3 6

3 Discuss following histogram techniques for Image

enhancement. (a) Histogram specification. (b) Local enhancement.

Level2 6

4 Discuss the frequency domain techniques of Image

enhancement in detail. Level1

2

UNIT-II

Unit-III

5 Discuss Image smoothing with the following

(a) Low pass spatial filtering (b) Median filtering. Level1

2

6 Distinguish between spatial domain techniques and frequency

domain techniques of Image enhancement. Level2

2

7

Sketch perspective plot of an 2-D Ideal High pass filter transfer

function and filter cross section and explain its usefulness in

Image enhancement.

Level2

3

8

What is meant by image enhancement?

(a) Discuss the need for enhancement

(b) Discuss the spatial domain methods for image enhancement.

Level2

2

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment–III

1 Explain about Iterative Nonlinear Restoration Using the Lucy- Richardson Algorithm.

Level4 5

2 (a) What is a Image Formation Model.

(b) Write about Various Image Observation Models with

Examples.

Level2 5

3 Explain in detail the interactive restoration of an image. Level2 5

4 (a) Explain the image degradation model for continuous functions

(b) Discuss about unconstrained, constrained restorations. Level2 5

5 (a)What is meant by image degradation? Discuss various

possibilities for image degradation. Level2 5

Page 85:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 82

UNIT-IV

S.

No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment–IV

1 What is Thresholding? Explain about Global Thresholding. Level4 5

2 (a) Find the edge Detection using function edge

(b) Explain about Sobel edge Detector.

Level2 5

3 Write about various edge Detectors available in function edge. Level4 5

4 (a) Discuss about Global processing via the Hough Transform.

(b) Explain about Global thresholding.

Level4 5

5 (a) Explain indetail the threshold selection based on

boundary characteristics.

Level2 5

UNIT-V

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course Outcome

Assignment–

V

1 What is Error Free Compression? Explain about variable

length coding. Level4 5

2 Compare lossless and lossy predictive coding methods. Level2 5

3

Construct its 3-bit IGS code. Consider an 8- pixel line of gray-

scale data, 12,12,13,13,10,13,57,54, which has been

uniformly quantized with 6-bit accuracy.

Level4

5

4 Compare lossless and lossy predictive coding methods. Level4 5

5 explain the lossy predictive coding model. With a neat diagram Level2 5

Page 86:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 83

S.

No

Question Blooms

taxonomy

level

Course

Outcomes

UNIT – I

DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS & IMAGE T RANSFORMS

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 List the steps involved in digital image processing Understand 1

2 How do you represent the digital images? Remember 1

3 Explain about sampling and quantization of an image. Understand 1

4 Explain a simple Image formation model Understand 1

5 Name various arithmetic and logical operations that can be

done on Images

Understand 1

6 What are the different fields in which Digital Image Processing

is used?

Remember 1

7 Explain about some of the geometrical operations that can be

done on images

Understand 1

8 Distinguish between Fourier Magnitude Spectrum, Fourier

Phase Spectrum and Power spectrum.

Remember 1

9 Define discrete cosine transform Understand 1

10 Define an Image Understand 1

11 What is meant by pixel? Understand 1

12 Define Resolutions Remember 1

13 What is Dynamic Range? Understand 1

14 What is meant by illumination and reflectance? Remember 1

15 Find the number of bits required to store a 256 X 256 image

with 32 gray levels

Remember 1

16 Write the expression to find the number of bits to store a digital

image?

Understand 1

17 What is the need for transform? Understand 1

Page 87:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 84

QUESTION BANK:

18 What is Image Transform? Understand 1

19 What are the applications of transform? Understand 1

20 What are the properties of unitary transform? Understand 1

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the steps involved in digital image processing Understand 1

2 Discuss about the following relationships between pixels with

neat diagrams

i) Neighbours of a pixel ii) Connectivity

iii) Distance measures

iv) Path

Remember 1

3 Write the expressions for Walsh transform kernel and Walsh

transform (1D &2D).

Remember 1

4 Briefly explain the forward and inverse transformation kernels

of image transforms

Understand 1

5 Name and explain some important properties of 2-D DFT Understand 1

6 Discuss about the Slant transform (1-D & 2-D) Remember 1

7 Discuss about the Hadamard transforms (1-D & 2-D) Remember 1

8 Discuss about the Haar transform (1-D & 2-D) Remember 1

9 Discuss about the Hotelling transforms (1-D & 2-D) Remember 1

10 State and prove separability property of 2D-DFT. Understand 1

11 State and prove the translation property Remember 1

12 State distributivity and scaling property Remember 1

GROUP – C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Calculate DCT matrix of order 8? Analyze 2

2 Calculate Haar Transform matrix of order 8? Analyze 2

3 Write Hadamard matrix of order 3? Apply 1

4 Compare different Transform Techniques. Apply 1

5 Obtain K L Transform for X=[1 2 1 0] Apply 2

UNIT – II

IMAGE ENHANCEMENT (SPATIAL DOMAIN & FREQUENCY DOMAIN)

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

Page 88:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 85

1 Narrate the concept of derivative filters. Understand 3

2 Discuss how the derivative filters are used in Digital Image

Enhancement?

Remember 3

3 Describe Histogram Specification Understand 3

4 Explain Gray level transformation functions for contrast

enhancement

Remember 3

5 Discuss the Image negatives transformations Understand 3

6 Discuss the Contrast stretching transformations Understand 3

7 Explain the Local enhancement Understand 3

8 Explain the Image subtraction Apply 3

9 Explain the Image averaging Apply 3

10 What is the objective of image enhancement? Define spatial

domain. Define point processing

Remember 3

11 Explain on procedure to derive frequency domain filtering from

spatial domain

Remember 3

12 Explain the method to set the cut off frequencies in ILPF? Analyze 3

13 Correspondence between filtering in the spatial & frequency

domains

Understand 3

14 Explanation on the basic steps for filtering used to enhance an

image in frequency domain

Understand 3

15 Explain the concept of homomorphism filtering Understand 3

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain smoothing spatial filters and nonlinear order statistic

spatial filters Understand 3

2 Explain about Prewitt and Sobel edge Detectors Remember 3

3 Describe image Histogram Equalization Remember 3

4 Explain the method of using the second derivate for Image

sharpening by Laplacian Operator Remember 3

5 What is high boost spatial filtering? Compare it with high pass

spatial filtering Understand 3

Page 89:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 86

6 Discuss how the Bit Plane Slicing is useful in image processing Understand 3

7 Discuss the importance of a kernel or mask or window in

spatial filtering used for enhancement of a digital image Analyze 3

8 How does the spatial filter with name Order static filter (non

linear filter) or median filter work? Evaluate 3

9 What is meant by image enhancement by point processing?

Discuss any two methods in it. Remember 3

10 . Define histogram of a digital image. Explain how histogram

is useful in image enhancement? Understand 3

11 . Write about Smoothing Spatial filters Understand 3

12 . What is meant by the Gradiant and the Laplacian? Discuss

their role in image enhancement. Remember 3

13 . Description of Homo-morphic filtering Remember 3

14 . Expression for 2-D IHPF, Expression for BHPF, Expression

for GHPF with sketches. Explain their usefulness in Image enhancement Apply 3

15 . Give the expression for 2-D ILPF, BLPF & GLPF functions

and sketch them. Explain their usefulness in Image enhancement Understand 3

16 . Expression for Butterworth Low Pass Filter in frequency

domain and discuss Remember 3

17 . Compare the characteristics of Low pass, High pass and

Homo-morphic filters in image enhancement in frequency domain. Analyze 3

18 . Discuss about Ideal High Pass Filter and Butterworth High

Pass filter Remember 3

19 . Discuss about Gaussian High Pass and Gaussian Low Pass

Filter Remember 3

20 . Explain how Laplacian is implemented in frequency domain Analyze 3

21 . Write about high boost and high frequency filtering Understand 3

GROUP – C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Compare Butterworth, Gaussian and ideal filter responses Analyze 3

2 Give the probability density functions for Rayleigh noise Remember 4

Page 90:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 87

models

3 Give the probability density functions for the Erlang noise

models Remember 4

4 Give the probability density functions for Gaussian noise

models Remember 4

5 Give the probability density functions for Salt and Pepper noise

models Remember 4

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the method of Least Mean Squares Filtering

(Wiener) for image restoration Understand 4

2 Explain model of image degradation/restoration process with a

block diagram Apply 4

3 Explain the method of Constrained Least Squares Filtering for

image restoration Understand 4

4 Explain three principle ways to estimate the degradation

function for use in image restoration Understand 4

5 Discuss the process of image restoration by direct inverse

filtering? Understand 4

6 Write about Noise Probability Density Functions for all noise

models Understand 4

7 Explain about iterative nonlinear restoration using the Lucy–

Richardson algorithm. Understand 4

GROUP – C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Apply Arithmetic, geometric, median filters of various sizes on

image.Analyze the result. Analyze 4

2 Obtain equations for butterworth,gaussian band reject filters Understand 4

3 Obtain equations for butterworth,gaussian band pass filters Understand 4

UNIT – IV

IMAGE SEGMENTATION & MORPHOLOGICAL IMAGE PROCESSING

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Write about edge detection Remember 5

2 Explain about the Local processing for edge linking Understand 5

3 Write short note on Region Growing Remember 5

Page 91:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 88

4 Write the mask for prewitt operator Remember 5

5 Write the mask for sobel operator Remember 5

6 Write the mask for laplacian operator Remember 5

7 Define segmentation Remember 5

8 Describe dilation morphological transformations on a binary

image

Apply 7

9 Describe erosion morphological transformations on a binary

image

Apply 7

10 Write short notes on Structuring elements in image

morphological transformations

Understand 7

11 Write short notes on Digital image water marking Remember 7

12 What are the Applications of morphology Remember 7

13 What are the Applications of digital water marking Remember 7

14 What is encoding technique in digital water marking Apply 7

15 What is decoding technique in digital water marking Apply 7

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What are the derivative operators useful in image

segmentation? Explain their role in segmentation Understand 5

2 What is thresholding? Explain about global thresholding Remember 5

3 Explain about basic adaptive thresholding process used in

image segmentation Understand 5

4 Explain in detail the threshold selection based on boundary

characteristics Understand 5

5 Explain about region based segmentation Understand 5

6 What are the derivative operators useful in image

segmentation? Explain their role in segmentation Apply 5

7 Explain about the Global processing via the Hough Transform

for edge linking Apply 5

8 Explain about the Global processing via graph-theoretic

techniques for edge linking Understand 5

9 Explain about Region Splitting and Merging with an example Apply 5

10 . Write about the importance of Hit-or-Miss morphological

transformation operation on a digital binary image Understand 7

Page 92:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 89

11 . Explain the opening operation in image morphology with

examples? Analyze 7

12 . Explain the closing operation in image morphology with

examples? Understand 7

13 . Discuss the main steps involved in Continuous

Wavelet Transform Understand 7

GROUP – C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Write short notes on Hit-miss Transformation Understand 7

2 Write short notes on dilation or erosion Understand 7

3 Explain region growing by pixel aggregation for image

segmentation. Analyze 7

UNIT – V

IMAGE COMPRESSION

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 How to calculate the memory required to store an image Understand 5

2 Define image compression Remember 5

3 What is image compression Remember 5

4 Explain Coding Redundancy Understand 5

5 Explain Interpixel Redundancy Understand 5

6 Explain Psycho visual Redundancy Understand 5

7 What are the characteristics of lossy compression Remember 5

8 What are the characteristics of lossless compression Remember 5

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain about fidelity criterion Understand 5

2 Explain about image compression models Understand 5

3 Explain a method of generating variable length codes with

an

example

Understand 5

4 Explain arithmetic encoding process with an example Apply 5

5 Explain LZW coding with an example. Apply 5

6 Explain the concept of bit plane coding method Understand 5

7 Explain about lossless predictive coding Understand 5

Page 93:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 90

8 Explain about lossy predictive coding Understand 5

9 Explain with a block diagram about transform coding

system Understand 5

GROUP – C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 How to find Huffman coding for the given data Analyz

e

5

Original

source

symbol

a2 a6 a1 a4 a3 a5

Probability 0.4 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.06 0.0

4

2 An 8 level image has the gray level distribution as given in

the table. Compute the average pixel length for each code,

compression ratio and Relative redundancy .

Analyze 5

rk

Pr(rk) Code 1 L1 (rk) Code 2 L2 (rk)

r8

7

0.25 101011

1

8 1 2

r1

2

8

0.47 100000

00

8 1 1

r1

8

6

0.25 110001

00

8 0 3

r2

5

5

0.03 111111

11

8 1 3

3 Explain about JPEG compression standard and the steps

involved in JPEG compression Understa

nd

5

Page 94:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 91

3.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

The subject microwave engineering may be also referred to as applied electromagnetic. The

importance of microwaves started way back in World War II period and later expanded its ways

out to domestic (microwave oven), military, commercial, satellite and etc. This subject starts with

the definition of microwave frequency range, its applications and its importance in modern era. The

microwave transmission lines like waveguides (rectangular, circular), micro-strips etc. and the

various microwave components like T-junctions, circulator, isolator etc. are discussed in detail to

enable the student to design microwave systems and sub- systems

3.2 PREREQUISITE(S):

Level Credits Periods Prerequisite

UG 4 4

Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines(EMTL), Antennas and

Wave Propagation (AWP)

3.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

University

Total SESSIONAL MARKS (25 MARKS) End Exam

Marks

Marks

There shall be 2 midterm examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and Objective type

tests.

Subjective test is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour. The objective type test

is for 10 marks with duration of 20 minutes. It consist of 10 Multiple choice

and 10 fill in the blanks. The student has to answer all the questions and each

carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first

unit of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the

remaining portion Five marks are earmarked for assignments. Marks shall be

75 100

Course Name : MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

Course Code : A70442

Class : IV B. Tech I Semester

Branch : ECE

Year : 2018 – 2019

Course Faculty : Mr. Ch. Ananda Kumar, Asst. Prof, Dept of ECE,

Page 95:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 92

awarded considering the average of two midterm examinations in each course

reason whatsoever, will get zero marks(s).

3.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

COURSE OBJECTIVES AND COURSE OUTCOMES:

AT THE END OF THE COURSE, THE STUDENTS WILL BE ABLE TO:

I. Develop the strong foundation on transmission lines for microwaves, cavity resonators and

waveguide components and applications.

II. Meliorate the knowledge of theoretical and technological aspects of microwave tube like

klystron, magnetron, travelling wave tube, etc.,

III. Correlate principles with applications with the microwave solid state devices.

IV. Enrich knowledge on modern microwave test bench for measure different parameters like

attenuation, VSWR, impedance etc.

3.5 COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Understand the significance microwaves and microwave transmission lines.

2. Analyze wave propagation in TE, TM or TEM modes, in structures such as rectangular

waveguides.

3. Compare the passive microwave components and applications such as directional couplers,

power dividers / Combiner and etc., with given characteristics.

4. Analyze and design microwave resonators

S.No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 90 Minutes 20

2 I Assignment ---- 05

3 II Mid Examination 90 Minutes 20

4 II Assignment ---- 05

5 External examination 3 Hours 75

Page 96:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 93

5. Analyze the characteristics of microwave tubes and compare them

6. Understand the characteristics of slow wave structures.

7. Differentiate the performance characteristic of microwave solid state devices.

8. Compare different types of magnetrons and their characteristics.

9. Understand the microwave bench setup for measuring microwave parameters

10. Understand the measurement of Q, attenuation and impedance.

3.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

A An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and

engineering H

Solving IES

Papers,

Assignment

and

Exercise

B An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to

analyze and interpret data H Assignment

C

An ability to design a system, component, or process to meet

desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic,

environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety,

manufacturability and sustainability.

S -------

D An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering

problems. H Assignment

E An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering

tools necessary for engineering practice. S

Assignment

s, Projects.

F

An ability to understand the special duty they owe to protect the

public’s health, safety and welfare by virtue of their professional

status as engineers in society.

N --

G

An ability to understand and correctly interpret the impact of

engineering solutions in global, societal and environmental

contexts and demonstrate the knowledge of a need for

sustainable development.

N -----

H An understanding of professional and ethical responsibility. S -----

I

An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a

member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary

settings.

N

J An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering S Document

Page 97:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 94

activities with the engineering community and with society at

large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective

reports and design documentation, make effective presentations,

give and receive clear instructions.

Prearation

K

An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering finance and management principles as a member

and leader in a team to manage projects in multi-disciplinary

environments.

S Assignment

L Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long

analyzing. H Assignment

HOW PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED

M

An ability to design and implement projects in the areas

including Signal Processing, Microwaves, Communication

Systems, IC Technology and Embedded Systems.

H

Lectures

and

assignments

N

An ability to use knowledge in various domains to identify

research gaps and hence to provide solution to new ideas and

innovations.

S Seminars &

Projects

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

3.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I

Microwave Transmission Lines - I: Introduction, Microwave Spectrum and Bands, Applications

of Microwaves. Rectangular Waveguides – Solution of Wave Equations in Rectangular

Coordinates. TE/TM mode analysis, Expressions for Fields. Characteristic Equation and Cut-off

Frequencies, Filter Characteristics, Dominant and Degenerate Modes, Sketches of TE and TM

mode fields in the cross-section, Mode Characteristics – Phase and Group Velocities. Wavelengths

and Impedance Relations, Illustrative Problems.

Rectangular Guides: Power Transmission and Power Losses. Impossibility of TEM Mode, Micro

strip Lines- Introduction, Z0 Relations, Effective Dielectric Constant, Losses. Q factor.

Unit – II

Cavity Resonators: Introduction, Rectangular Cavities, Dominant Modes and Resonant

Frequencies. Q factor and Coupling Coefficients. Illustrative Problems

Waveguide Components And Applications: Coupling Mechanisms – Probe, Loop, Aperture

types. Waveguide Discontinuities - Waveguide Windows, Tuning Screws and Posts. Matched

Page 98:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 95

Loads. Waveguide Attenuators – Different Types, Resistive Card and Rotary Vane Attenuators:

Waveguide Phase Shifters — Types, Dielectric and Rotary Vane Phase Shifters, Waveguide

Multiport Junctions — E plane and H plane Tees, Magic Tee. Directional Couplers – 2 Hole. Bethe

Hole types, Illustrative Problems.

Ferrites-Composition and Characteristics. Faraday Rotation: Ferrite Components — Gyrator,

Isolator, Circulator.

Unit – III

Microwave Tubes: Limitations and Losses of conventional tubes at microwave frequencies.

Microwave tubes – 0 type and M type classifications, O-type tubes: 2 Cavity Klystrons – Structure,

Reentrant Cavities, Velocity Modulation Process and Applegate Diagram, Bunching Process and

Small Signal Theory – Expressions for o/p Power and Efficiency. Reflex Klystrons — Structure,

Velocity Modulation and Applegate Diagram, Mathematical Theory of Bunching, Power Output,

Efficiency. Oscillating Modes and 0/p Characteristics, Effect of Repeller Voltage on Power O/p,

Illustrative Problems

Helix TWTs: Significance, Types and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT

and Amplification Process (qualitative treatment). Suppression of Oscillations, Gain

Considerations

Unit – IV:

M-TypeTubes: introduction, Cross-field effects, Magnetrons – Different Types, Cylindrical

Traveling Wave Magnetron – Hull Cut-off and Hartree Conditions, Modes of Resonance and Pl-

Mode Operation, Separation of PI-Mode. o/p characteristics, Illustrative Problems.

Microwave Solid State Devices: Introduction. Classification. Applications. TEDs — Introduction,

Gunn Diodes — Principle, RWH Theory, Characteristics, Basic Modes of Operation – Gunn

Oscillation Modes, LSA Mode, Introduction to Avalanche Transit Time Devices.

UNIT-V

Microwave Measurements: Scattering Matrix- Significance, Formulation and Properties, S

Matrix Calculations for – 2 port Junctions, E plane and H plane Tees. Magic Tee. Circulator and

isolator. Illustrative Problems.

Description of Microwave Bench – Different Blocks and their Features, Errors and Precautions;

Microwave Power Measurement – BolorMeters Measurement of Attenuation, Frequency Standing

Page 99:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 96

Wave Measurements — Measurement of Low and High VSWR, Cavity Q. Impedance

Measurements

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Microwave Devices and Circuits – Samuel Y. Liao, Pearson, 3rd

Edition, 2003 [T1]

2. Microwave Principles – Herbert J. Reich, J. G. Skalnik, P. F .Ordung and H.L. Krauss, CBS

Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2004.[T2]

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Foundation FOR Microwave Engineering – R. E. Collin, IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd

Edition, 2002 [R1]

2. Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices – M.L. Sisodia and G.S. Raghuvanshi, Wiley

Eastern Ltd., New Age International publishers Ltd., 1995.[R2]

3. Microwave Engineering Passive Circuits – Peter A. Rizzi, PHI, 1999.[R3]

4. Electronic and Radio Engineering – F. E Terman, McGraw-Hill, 4th

Ed., 1955.[R4]

5. Microwave Engineering – A. Das and S.K. Das, TMH,2nd

Ed., 2009.[R5]

6. Microwave Engineering – G.S. Raghuvanshi and K. Satya Prasad, Cengage Learning,

2012.[R6]

3.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following course learning outcomes:

Lecture

Course Learning Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference

No.

1

MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION LINES

R4 1

Describe the Microwaves : Introduction, Microwave Spectrum and

Bands

2 List out applications of Microwaves Applications of Microwaves R4 1

3-5

Analyze the Rectangular Waveguides –

Rectangular Waveguides – TE/TM mode R4 4.3.5

TE/TM mode analysis analysis

Page 100:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 97

6-7

Analyze Mathematical Derivations for

Expressions for Fields, Characteristic R4.3.7

various field configurations in

Equation and Cut-off Frequencies

Rectangular Waveguides

8 Identify various types of Modes Filter Characteristics, Dominant and R4 4.3.14

Degenerate Modes

9

Sketches of TE and TM mode fields

in the R4 4.3.5

Analyze Spatial representation of

Modes

cross-section

10-11

Explain Wavelengths and

Impedance

Mode characteristics –Phase and Group R4 4.3.8

velocities & Wavelengths and Impedance

Relations

Relations

12-13

Summarize Power Transmission and

Power Transmission and Power

Losses in R4 4.3.12-

Power Losses in Waveguides Rectangular Guide, Related Problems 13

14

Compare various parameters of Micro Micro strip Lines– Introduction, Zo R4

strip Lines Relations,

15 Explain effective dielectric constant Effective Dielectric Constant R4

16 Define Q factor

Q factor, Cavity Resonators–

Introduction

R4 5.9

17 Classify various cavities Rectangular and Cylindrical Cavities R4 5.2

18 Analyze Mode Characteristics Dominant Modes and Resonant R4 5.3

Frequencies

19 Distinguish Mode Characteristics, Q factor and Coupling Coefficients, R4 5.11

Related Problems.

20 List out various types of coupling Waveguide Components And R4 6.9

Applications : Coupling Mechanisms

Page 101:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 98

– Probe, Loop, Aperture types

21

Illustrate waveguide discontinuities

Waveguide Discontinuities – Waveguide R4 6.8

irises, Tuning Screws and Posts, Matched

Loads

22 Define Attenuators

Waveguide Attenuators – Resistive Card, R4 6.15

Rotary Vane attenuators

23 Explain about Phase Shifters

Waveguide Phase Shifters – Dielectric, R4 6.14

Rotary Vane types.

24-25

Compare different types of T

Junctions

Waveguide Multiport Junctions – E plane R4 6.3.1

and H plane Tees

26

Explain Directional Coupler

Magic Tee, Hybrid Ring; Directional R4 6.3.3

Couplers – 2 Hole, Bethe Hole types.

Problems.

27-28 Classify Ferrites and their

Ferrites– Composition and Characteristics, R4 6.11

Characteristics Faraday Rotation

29-30

Distinguish Ferrite Components – Ferrite Components – Gyrator,

Isolator

R4 6.11.2

Gyrator, Isolator

31 Define Circulator Circulator. Scattering Matrix– R4 6.11.2 Significance, Formulation and

Properties.

32-33 Formulate T Junction S Matrix S Matrix Calculations for – 2 port R4 6.2.1

derivation Junction, E plane and H plane Tees

34-35 Solve problems based on Ferrites

Magic Tee, Directional Coupler, Circulator R4 6.16

and Isolator, Problems

36

MICROWAVE TUBES: Limitations and R4 8.2

Illustrate about Conventional Tubes Losses of conventional tubes at microwave

frequencies

37 Compare Microwave tubes – O type Microwave tubes – O type and M R4 8.4

Page 102:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 99

and type

M type classifications classifications

38 Categorize O-type tubes : 2 Cavity O-type tubes : 2 Cavity Klystrons – R4 8.5.1

Klystrons Structure, Reentrant Cavities,

39

Velocity Modulation Process and R4 8.5.1

Apply Velocity Modulation Process

Applegate Diagram

40 Analyze Bunching Process and its Bunching Process and Small Signal R4 8.5.1

Theory – Expressions for o/p Power and

mathematical treatment

Efficiency

41 Examine Reflex Klystron Operation

Reflex Klystrons – Structure, Applegate R4 8.5.4

Diagram and Principle of working

42 Formulate derivation of Klystron

Mathematical Theory of Bunching, Power R4 8.5.4

Parameters Output, Efficiency

43 Classify different oscillating modes

Oscillating modes and o/p characteristics, R4 8.5.4

Effect of repeller voltage on power o/p

44

List out various types of Slow Wave

Significance, Types and Characteristics of R4

Tubes Slow Wave Structures

45 Apply Structure of TWT and Structure of TWT and Amplification R4 8.6

Amplification Process Process (qualitative treatment)

46

Interpret Suppression of Oscillations, Suppression of Oscillations, Gain R4 8.6

Learn about Gain Considerations Considerations

47

Compare M-Type Tubes

M-TYPE TUBES : Introduction, Cross- R4 8.8

field effects, Magnetrons – Different

Types

48

Analyze 8-Cavity Cylindrical

Travelling

8-Cavity Cylindrical Travelling

Wave R4

Magnetron – Hull Cut-off and Hartree

Wave Magnetron and its characteristics

Conditions

Page 103:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 100

49 Identify different modes in M

Tubes

Modes of Resonance and PI-Mode R4

Operation, Separation of PI-Mode, o/p

characteristics.

50 Solve Related Problems Related Problems R4 8.9

51 Demonstrate Introduction,

MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES R4 9.4

Classification, Applications : Introduction, Classification, Applications

52 Compare Transferred Electronic TEDs – Introduction, Gunn Diode – R4 9.10

Devices Principle, RWH Theory, Characteristics

53 Examine basic modes of Operation,

Basic Modes of Operation, Oscillation R4 9.10

Oscillation Modes Modes

54 Classify Avalanche Transit Time Avalanche Transit Time Devices – R4 9.11

Devices Introduction

55 Explain IMPATT and TRAPATT

IMPATT and TRAPATT Diodes – R4 9.11.1-3

Diodes – Principle of Operation and

Principle of Operation and Characteristics

Characteristics

56

Summarize Classification,

Applications Classification, Applications

R4 9.11

57-58

MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS: R4 7.2 Compare various types of

microwave Description of Microwave Bench –

measurement techniques and Classify Different Blocks and their Features

various types of Microwave Precautions

Measurement Techniques Microwave Power Measurement – R4 7.5 Bolometer Method

59

Measurement of Attenuation R4 7.6

Illustrate various types of

Microwave

60-61

Frequency standing wave measurements- R4 7.8.1

Measurement Techniques measurement of low VSWR

measurement of high VSWR R4 7.8.2

62 Explain measurement of Q and Measurement of Cavity Q & R4 7.13

Page 104:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 101

Analyze Impedance

microwave impedance

measurement Measurements R4 7.9

3.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF THE PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:

Course

Program Outcomes

Program Specific

Outcomes

Objectives

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9

PO1

0

PO1

1

PO1

2 PSO

1 PSO2

I H S S H

II S H H S

III S S S

IV H H S S

V H H S H

S= Supportive H = Highly Related

3.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOME LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF THE PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:

Course

Program

Outcomes

Program Specific

Outcomes

Outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1

PSO2

1 H H S S H

2 H S H S H

3 H S H S H S

4 H S H S S H S

5 S H S S H

6 H H S S H

7 H H S H S

8 H S H S

9 S S

10 H S H S

S –Supportive H - Highly Related

Page 105:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 102

3.11 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

S. No

QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial - I

1

An air-filled rectangular guide operates at 9.375 GHz

with a guide wavelength of 5.0cm. Determine its phase

constant, group velocity

Remember 1

2

A rectangular cavity resonator has dimensions of a = 5

cms, b = 2 cms and d = 10 cms. Compute the resonant

frequency of the dominant mode if the cavity is

i. Air filled and

ii. ii. Dielectric filled with єr = 2.3

Evaluate 1

3 Derive the wave equations for TM mode.

Evaluate 1

4 Find the cut–off frequency of the dominant mode for an air filled rectangular waveguide when a = 6cm and b = 2 cm for TE wave?

Understand 1

5 When the dominant mode is propagated through a waveguide at a frequency of 9GHz, the guide wavelength is found to be 4cms. Find the breadth of the waveguide.

Remember 1

Tutorial - II

1 Derive the wave equations for TM mode.

Evaluate 1

2 A directional coupler is having coupling actor = 10 dB and directivity = 40 dB determine the power coupled in forward and reverse direction when input power is 10W assuming the coupler is lossless

Understand 2

3 A rectangular wave guide with dimension of 3 x 2 cm

operates in the TM11 mode at 10 GHz. Determine the

characteristic wave impedance. Analyze 1

4 A wave length termination having VSWR of 1.1 is used

to dissipate 100 W of power. Find received power Remember 2

5 An attenuator of 20dB is fed with 100w input. Find the

output power of the attenuator. Understand 2

6 For a directional coupler, the incident power is 550mW.

Calculate the power in the main and auxiliary arm. The

coupling factor is 30 dB.

Analyze 2

Tutorial - III

1 Derive the expression for output power & Efficiency of a

2 cavity klystron. Understand 3

Page 106:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 103

SIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

2 A reflex klystron having an accelerated field of 300v

oscillates at a frequency of 10GHZ with a retarding field

of 500v. If its cavity is returned to 9GHZ. What must be

the new value of retarding field from oscillations in the

same mode to take place?

Analysis 3

3 Formulate the expression for optimum drift space

distance Loptimum in a Two Cavity Klystron Amplifier. Create 3

4 In a two-cavity klystron the parameters are, input power

=10mW, voltage gain = 20dB, Rsh of input cavity

=25KΩ, Rsh of output cavity = 35KΩ, oad resistance = 40

KΩ. Find input voltage, output voltage and power to the

load.

Analysis 3

Tutorial – IV

1 The parameters of a twp- cavity klystron are given by

Vb=900V, f=3.2 GHz, and d=10-3

m. Determine electron

velocity, transit angle, and beam coupling coefficient. Analysis 3

2 Determine the gain parameter C for a TWTA with Beam current 30mA, characteristic impedance 10Ω, and Beam voltage 3KV.

Evaluate 3

3 A Gunn device operates in the transit time mode of 20 GHz. If it is fabricated from gallium arsenide, find length of device. Consider that Vs=10 cm/s

Understand 4

4 Determine the hull cutoff voltage for a given anode voltage of 26kv. Assume radii of cathode and anode cylinders as 5cm and 10cm respectively.

Evaluate 4

5

Tutorial - V

1 Define the method for measuring VSWR<10?

Remember 5

2 The peak power is 1KW. The duty cycle is 10-3

. Find the average Power.

Remember 5

3 Find the Q of a cavity resonator, if its resonating frequency and bandwidth are 9 GHz and 1MHz respectively

Understand 5

4 The input power given to an attenuator is 1000 W. The output power produced by the attenuator is 1W. Calculate the value of the attenuator.

Remember 5

5 In a microwave measurement it is observed that λ0=3 cm and λC=4 cm. Find λG.

Remember 5

S. QUESTION Blooms Course

Page 107:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 104

No

Taxonomy

Level

Outcome

ASSIGNMENT-I

UNIT-I

MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION LINES-I

1

What are the dominated and degenerate modes?

What is the significance of dominant modes?

Indicate the dominant mode in rectangular wave

guide and calculate fc for the same.

Remember

1

2

A rectangular waveguide has dimensions 2.5 X 5

cms. Determine the guide wavelength, phase

constant and phase velocity at a wavelength of 4.5

cms for dominant mode.

Apply

1

3

What is a Microwave spectrum bands? Explain

briefly the applications of microwaves at various

frequency bands.

Remember

1

4

Rectangular wave guide is filled by dielectric

material of εr= 9 and has dimensions of 7 × 3.5 cm.

It operates in the dominant TE mode.

I. Determine the cut off frequency.

II. Find the phase velocity in the guide at a

frequency of 2 GHz

III. Find the guided wave length at 2GHz.

Understand

1

5 Derive the expression for cutoff frequency of

TEmn mode in rectangular wave guide. Remember 1

6 Derive the wave equations for TE mode.

Evaluate 1

7 Derive the wave equations for TM mode.

Evaluate 1

8 Derive an expression for microwave impedance for

TE waves in rectangular wave guide. Understand 1

9 Derive an expression for microwave impedance for

TM waves in rectangular wave guide. Understand 1

10 Derive the expression for power transmission in

waveguide

Remember 1

UNIT-II

CAVITY RESONATORS &WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS AND APPLICATIONS

1

Derive the expression for Rectangular cavity

resonator.

Evaluate 2

2

Prove that a cavity resonator is nothing but an LC

circuit.

Analyze 2

3

Explain E-H plane Tee junction. Why a hybrid E-H

plane Tee referred to as Magic Tee. Derive the

scattering matrix for E-H plane Tee junction.

Understand 2

4 Explain the applications of Directional Couplers

and obtain scattering matrix. Understand 2

5 Explain about quality factor of a cavity resonator. Understand 2

Page 108:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 105

6 Explain the principle of working a Magic Tee

junction with neat schematics? Evaluate 2

7 Explain the principle of working of E-H plane Tee

junction with neat schematics? Analyze 2

8 Explain the principle of working of two-hole

Directional coupler with neat schematics? Understand 2

9 Explain Bethe hole Directional coupler and write

applications of directional couplers? Evaluate 2

10

Explain the following characteristics related to

Directional coupler

i)Coupling factor ii)Directivity iii) Isolation

Remember 2

UNIT-III

MICROWAVE TUBES

1 What is Gunn effect? Explain the operation of

Gunn diode. Remember 3

2 Explain is the principle of working for Two –

Cavity Klystron with velocity diagram. Understand 3

3 Derive the expression for output power &

Efficiency of a 2 cavity klystron. Understand 3

4

Explain in detail bunching process & obtain

expression for bunching parameter in a two cavity

klystron amplifier.

Understand 3

5

What are the limitations of conventional tubes

at microwave frequencies? Explain how these

limitations can be overcome.

Understand 3

6

Name different methods of generating microwave

power. Describe the necessary theory & Working

of reflex klystron.

Understand 3

7

Explain in detail bunching process & obtain

expression for bunching parameter in a two cavity

klystron amplifier.

Understand 3

8

Explain the principle of operation of a reflex

Klystron oscillator and derive an expression for the

bunching parameter.

Understand 3

9 Explain the construction & working of two cavity

klystron amplifier. Remember 3

10 Explain the operation of a reflex klystron By means

of applegate diagram? Understand 3

ASSIGNMENT – II

UNIT-IV

M-TYPE TUBES & MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES

1 Explain the working Magnetron with π mode

oscillation. Understand 4

2 List out the differences in performances and

applications of Klystrons and TWTs. Remember 4

3

What is meant by Avalanche Transit Time

Devices? Explain the operation, construction and

Applications of IMPATT.

Remember 4

4 How is bunching achieved in a cavity magnetron?

Explain the phase focusing effect. Analyze 4

Page 109:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 106

QUESTION BANK

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION LINES-I

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS) 1. List the typical applications of microwaves. Remember 1 2. Define the dominant mode of a waveguide? Understand 1 3. What are microwaves? Why they are so called? Understand 1 4. Define waveguide? Mention some of its features? Remember 1 5. What is TE, TM & TEM modes? Understand 1 6. Define dominant mode and degenerate mode? Remember 1 7. Define cutoff frequency of a waveguide. Evaluate 1

8. What is dominant mode of a rectangular waveguide for TE and TM modes and why?

Remember 1

9 Find the cut–off frequency of the dominant mode for an air filled rectangular waveguide when a = 6cm and

Understand 1

5 Explain Gunn effect using the two valley theory. Understand 4

6 Derive the criterion for classifying the modes of

operation for Gunn effect diodes. Analyze 4

7 Explain the physical structure and construction of

IMPATT diodes. Remember 4

8 Write short notes on “LS mode in GUNN diode”. Analysis 4

9 Describe the operation of TRAPATT diode. Remember 4

10 Describe the operation of BARITT diode. Remember 4

UNIT-V

MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS

1

Explain the measurement of attenuation using

power ratio method with neat block diagram?

Understand 5

2 Draw a neat diagram of microwave test bench and

explain about each block along with its features. Understand 5

3 Explain Slotted line method for impedance

measurement. Understand 5

4 Explain the measurement of microwave power

using bolometer method. Remember 5

5 Explain the measurement of phase shift Remember 5

6 Explain the method of measurement of high

VSWR. Understand 5

7 Explain the RF substitution method of

measurement of attenuation. Understand 5

8 Explain the measurement of Q of a cavity

resonator. Understand 5

9 Explain the measurement of frequency using wave

meter method. Understand 5

10 Explain the high power measurements using

calorimetric method Understand 5

Page 110:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 107

b = 2 cm for TE wave? 10. Name the microwave frequency bands and spectrums.

Understand 1

11. Define phase velocity. Understand 1 12. What is meant by group velocity? Understand 1

13. What is the relation between phase and group velocities in terms

Understand 1

of light velocity?

14. Define guide wavelength. Evaluate 1 15. Summarize the advantages of microwaves. Understand 1

16. What are the advantages of dominant mode propagation?

Evaluate 1

17. What are the advantages and disadvantages of micro strip lines?

Analyze 1

18. Explain briefly about impossibility of TEM Modes.

Understand 1

PART-B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. Derive the TMmn mode field equation in rectangular

waveguide. Remember 1

2.

What are the dominated and degenerate modes? What is the significance of dominant modes? Indicate the dominant mode in rectangular wave guide and calculate fc for the same.

Remember 1

3.

A rectangular waveguide has dimensions 2.5 X 5 cms. Determine the guide wavelength, phase constant and phase velocity at a Wavelength of 4.5 cms for dominant mode.

Apply 1

4. What is a Microwave spectrum bands? Explain briefly the Applications of microwaves at various frequency bands.

Remember 1

5. Explain the TE and TM modes of propagation in waveguides. Why TEM wave does not exist in a rectangular wave guide

Understand 1

6. Explain the wave impedance of a rectangular waveguide and derive the expression for the wave impedance of TE and TM modes.

Understand 1

7. A rectangular wave guide with dimension of 3 x 2 cm operates in the TM11 mode at 10 GHz. Determine the characteristic wave impedance.

Analyze 1

8.

A Rectangular wave guide is filled by dielectric material of εr= 9 and has dimensions of 7 × 3.5 cm. It operates in the dominant TE mode. I. Determine the cut off frequency II. II. Find the phase velocity in the guide at a frequency of 2 GHz III. III. Find the guided wave length at 2GHz.

Understand 1

9. Derive the expression for cutoff frequency of TEmn mode in rectangular wave guide.

Remember 1

10. Derive an expression for microwave impedance for TE waves in rectangular wave guide.

Understand 1

11. Derive an expression for microwave impedance for TM waves in rectangular wave guide

Understand 1

Page 111:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 108

12. Derive the expression for power transmission in

waveguide Remember 1

PART-C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1. Can a waveguide have more than one cut-off

frequency? On what factors does the cut-off frequency

of a wave guide depend?

Understand 1

2. When the dominant mode is propagated through a waveguide at a frequency of 9GHz, the guide wavelength is found to be 4cms. Find the breadth of the waveguide.

Remember 1

UNIT-II CAVITY RESONATORS &WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS AND APPLICATIONS

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. Define the attenuation constant. Remember 2

2. What is meant by cavity resonator? Understand 2 3. Define resonant frequency and give its expression. Understand 2

4. Derive the resonant frequency for TE101 mode. Understand 2

5. What are the applications of cavity resonator? Evaluate 2 6. Define quality factor of a cavity resonator Evaluate 2 7. Explain the waveguide discontinuities? Remember 2

8. Describe the characteristic features of resonant windows?

Understand 2

9. Mention the applications of Hybrid Tee junction? Remember 2 10. Mention the applications of resonant Iris? Understand 2

11. Mention the applications of capacitive and Inductive Iris?

Evaluate 2

12. What is directional coupler? Understand 2

13. Describe the principle of working of a wave guide attenuator, with neat schematics?

Understand 2

14. List out the different types of waveguide Irises? Understand 2 15. Give the properties of S-matrix. Evaluate 2 16. What is Isolator? Analyze 2 17. What is Gyrator? Analyze 2

PART-B(LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Derive the cut-off frequency expression for Rectangular cavity resonator.

Evaluate 2

2 Prove that a cavity resonator is nothing but an LC

circuit. Analyze 2

3 Explain E-H plane Tee junction. Why a hybrid E-H plane Tee referred to as Magic Tee. Derive the scattering matrix for E-H plane Tee junction.

Understand 2

4 Explain the applications of Directional Couplers and obtain scattering matrix.

Understand 2

5 What is the application of Circulator? Derive the S

matrix for Circulator with neat diagram?

Remember 2

6 Explain about quality factor of a cavity resonator. Understand 2

7 Explain the principle of working an H-plane Tee junction with neat schematics.

Understand 2

8.

Explain the principle of working an E-plane Tee junction with neat schematics?

Analyze 2

Page 112:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 109

9. Explain the principle of working a Magic Tee junction with neat schematics?

Evaluate 2

10. Explain the principle of working of two-hole Directional coupler with neat schematics?

Understand 2

11. Explain Bethe hole Directional coupler and write applications of directional couplers?

Evaluate 2

12. Explain the following characteristics related to Directional coupler i)Coupling factor ii)Directivity iii) Isolation

Remember 2

PART-C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1. Prove that it is impossible to construct a perfectly matched, loss less, reciprocal three port junction.

Remember 2

2.

A wave length termination having VSWR of 1.1 is

used to dissipate 100 W of power. Find received power Remember 2

3.

An attenuator of 20dB is fed with 100w input. Find the

output power of the attenuator. Understand 2

UNIT-III

MICROWAVE TUBES

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. State the limitations of conventional tubes at

microwave frequencies Remember 3

2. What is the principle of two cavity Klystron amplifier? Remember 3

3. What are the applications of reflex klystron? Understand 3

4. State the characteristics of the two-cavity klystron amplifier.

Remember 3

5. Compare TWT& Klystron amplifier. Analyze 3

6. Draw the schematic diagram of helix travelling wave tube?

Understand 3

7. What is meant by reflex klystron? Remember 3

8. What are the performance characteristics of klystron amplifier?

Remember 3

9. Differentiate between klystrons and TWT. Analyze 3

10. State the applications of the two-cavity klystron amplifier.

Remember 3

11. Why multi-cavity klystrons are preferred? Remember 3

12. How are oscillations avoided in travelling wave tube? Remember 3

13

Discuss in detail about lead inductance and inter

electrode capacitance effects of conventional tubes at

microwave frequencies.

Understand 3

14.

Differentiate between O – type tubes and M – type tubes.

Analysis 3

15.

What is the condition for obtaining the power output in reflex klystron?

Apply 3

16. What is transit time? Analyze 3

17. What is the operating principle of reflex klystron? Remember 3

18. What is velocity and current modulation in a reflex klystron?

Remember 3

19 How does bunching occur in a reflex klystron? Remember 3

20 Explain clearly the classification of microwave sources.

Understand 3

Page 113:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 110

21 What is the operating frequency, power output and efficiency of a reflex klystron?

Remember 3

22 What are the devices used as a microwave signal sources?

Remember 3

23 Write the classification of microwave tubes. Apply 3

24 What is TWTA? Remember 3

25 What is the need of slow – wave structures? Remember 3

26 What are the assumptions for calculation of RF Power in Reflex Klystron?

Remember 3

27 What is the effect of transit time? Remember 3

28 List the applications of TWT. Remember 3

29 What do you mean by O-type tubes? Name some O-type tubes.

Understand 3

30 List the parameters on which bunching depend on? Remember 3

31. Compare between two cavity klystron and reflex klystron?

Analyze 3

32 State the advantages of TWT. Remember 3

33 State the effects of frequency rise in conventional tubes.

Remember 3

34 Explain briefly about linear beam tubes and crossed field tubes

Understand 3

35 Sketch the functional diagram of two-cavity amplifier. Apply 3

36 Compare “Drift space bunching” and “Reflector bunching”.

Analyze 3

37 Compare magnetron and reflex klystron. Analyze 3

38 List the drawbacks of klystron amplifiers. Remember 3

39 What is the condition for oscillation in Reflex klystron?

Understand 3

40 List different types of magnetrons? Remember 3

41. What are the performance characteristics of TWT? Understand 3

42. What are the desirable properties of slow wave structures to be used in TWT amplifiers?

Understand 3

43. What do you mean by M-type tubes? Name some M-type tubes.

Understand 3

44. Draw the schematic diagram of two cavity klystron amplifier?

Understand 3

45. What is the need of slow wave structures in TWT? Understand 3 46. Write the basic modes of operation in magnetron? Understand 3 47. What is klystron tube? Remember 3 48. What is reflex klystron oscillator? Remember 3

PART-B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What is Gunn effect? Explain the operation of Gunn

diode Remember 3

2 Explain is the principle of working for Two – Cavity

Klystron with velocity diagram. Understand 3

3 Derive the expression for output power & Efficiency

of a 2 cavity klystron. Understand 3

4

Explain in detail bunching process & obtain expression

for Bunching parameter in a two cavity klystron

amplifier.

Understand 3

5 What are the limitations of conventional tubes at Understand 3

Page 114:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 111

microwave frequencies? Explain how these limitations

can be overcome.

6

A reflex klystron having an accelerated field of 300v

oscillates at a frequency of 10GHZ with a retarding

field of 500v. If its cavity is returned to 9GHZ. What

must be the new value of retarding field from

oscillations in the same mode to take place?

Analysis 3

7

Name different methods of generating microwave

power. Describe the necessary theory & Working of

reflex klystron.

Understand 3

8

Explain in detail bunching process & obtain expression

for bunching parameter in a two cavity klystron

amplifier.

Understand 3

9

Explain the principle of operation of a reflex Klystron

oscillator and derive an expression for the bunching

parameter.

Understand 3

10 Explain the construction & working of two cavity

klystron amplifier. Remember 3

PART-C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Formulate the expression for optimum drift space

distance Loptimum in a Two Cavity Klystron Amplifier. Create 3

2

A reflex klystron operates at 8 GHz with dc beam

voltage 300 V, Repeller space=1mm for 1 mode.

Calculate PRFmax Remember 3

3 Determine the gain parameter C for a TWTA with Beam current 30mA, characteristic impedance 10Ω, and Beam voltage 3KV. Evaluate 3

UNIT-IV

M-TYPE TUBES & MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What is transferred electron effect? Remember 4

2 What is negative resistance in Gunn diode? Remember 4

3 What are the applications of Microwave Solid-State Devices?

Understand 4

4 What are the elements that exhibit Gunn Effect? Remember 4

5 Mention the applications of Gunn diode amplifier. Remember 4

6 Why magnetron is called as cross field devices? Understand 4

7 What are the types of magnetrons? Remember 4

8 Write short notes on negative resistance magnetron. Understand 4

9 State the power output and efficiency of magnetron. Understand 4

10 Write the applications of magnetron. Understand 4

11 What is GUNN effect? Understand 4

Page 115:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 112

12 Explain transferred electron effect. Understand 4

13 What is the principle of TRAPATT diode? Remember 4

14 What is the principle of IMPATT diode? Remember 4

15 What is the principle of BARITT diode? Remember 4

PART-B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the working Magnetron with π mode oscillation.

Understand 4

2 What is meant by Avalanche Transit Time Devices? Explain the operation, construction and Applications of IMPATT.

Remember 4

3 Explain avalanche transit time devices Understand 4

4 Write short notes on “8 cavity magnetron” Remember 4

5 Explain Gunn effect using the two valley theory. Understand 4

6 Derive the criterion for classifying the modes of operation for Gunn effect diodes.

Analyze 4

7 Describe the operation of IMPATT diode. Remember 4

8 Explain the physical structure and construction of IMPATT diodes.

Remember 4

9 Write short notes on “LSA mode in GUNN diode”. Analysis 4

10 Derive the criterion for classifying the modes of operation for Gunn effect diodes.

Understand 4

11 Describe the operation of TRAPATT diode. Remember 4

12 Describe the operation of BARITT diode. Remember 4

PART-C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 A Gunn device operates in the transit time mode of 20 GHz. If it is fabricated from gallium arsenide, find length of device. Consider that Vs=10 cm/s

Understand 4

2 Determine the hull cutoff voltage for a given anode voltage of 26kv. Assume radii of cathode and anode cylinders as 5cm and 10cm respectively.

Evaluate 4

UNIT-V MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS

PART-A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define the method for measuring VSWR<10? Remember 5

2 What is the principle of microwave frequency measurement?

Remember 5

3 State various methods for measuring attenuation? Understand 5

4 Write the S-matrix for Isolator and Gyrator? Analyze 5

5 Write the S-matrix for E-Plane and H-Plane tee Analyze 5

6 Write the s-matrix for directional coupler. Understand 5

Page 116:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 113

7 Define Voltage standing wave ratio. Remember 5

8 Define Reflection coefficient. Remember 5

9 List the methods used for measuring the low and high VSWR?

Remember 5

10 Write a short notes on power ratio method. Understand 5

11 Write short notes on RF substitution method. Understand 5

12 Write short notes on measurement of phase shift. Understand 5

13 List the devices used in microwave bench setup. Remember 5

PART-B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the measurement of attenuation using power ratio method with neat block diagram?

Understand 5

2 Explain Slotted line method for impedance measurement.

Understand 5

3 Draw a neat diagram of microwave test bench and explain about each block along with its features.

Understand 5

4 Explain the measurement of microwave power using bolometer method.

Remember 5

5 Explain the measurement of phase shift. Remember 5

6 Explain the method of measurement of high VSWR. Understand 5

7 Explain the RF substitution method of measurement of attenuation

Understand 5

8 Explain the measurement of Q of a cavity resonator. Understand 5

9 Explain the frequency measurement techniques. Understand 5

10 What are the different techniques employed in measuring impedance? Explain any one method.

Remember 5

11 Explain the measurement of frequency using wave meter method

Understand 5

12 Explain the high power measurements using calorimetric method.

Understand 5

PART-C (ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 In a microwave measurement it is observed that λ0=3 cm and λC=4 cm. Find λG.

Remember 5

2 The peak power is 1KW. The duty cycle is 10

-3. Find

the average Power. Remember 5

3 Convert -30 dBm and 0 dBW into absolute power. Understand 5

4 The reflection coefficient of a given microwave component is 0.5 Find its VSWR.

Remember 5

5 Find the Q of a cavity resonator, if its resonating frequency and bandwidth are 9 GHz and 1MHz respectively

Understand 5

6 The input power given to an attenuator is 1000 W. The output power produced by the attenuator is 1W. Calculate the value of the attenuator.

Remember 5

Page 117:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 114

3.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. The range of microwave frequencies is given by

a. 1 GHZ to 300 GHZ b.1 MHZ to 300 MHz

c. 1 KHz to 300 Khz d. None

2. When the operating frequencies are equal to cut – off frequency constant ‘γ’ will be

a. γ = 0 b. γ = infinity c. γ= 1 d. γ = 1.5

3. The velocity of light C interms of permiablity µ0, €0 in space is given by

a. C = √ µ0/ €0 b. C = √ €0/ µ0 c. C = √ €0/*µ0 d. None

4. At lower frequencies the propagation constant ‘γ’ is

a. Real and positive b. Real and negativee

c. Imaginary and positive d. Imaginary and negative

5. The nature of propagation constant ‘γ’ at higher frequency is

a. Real b. Imaginary c. Zero d. None

6. For a dominant mode the value of cut – off wave length is

a. Zero b. Minimum c. Maximum d. None

7. which of the following is the dominant mode TMin wave guide

a. TM12 b. TM21 c. TM11 d. TM22

8. What is the value of cut – off wave length for the dominant waves

a. λ c11 = 2ab/√(a2

-b2) b. λ c11 = 2ab/√(a

2+b

2)

c. λ c11 = √(a2-b

2)/ 2ab d. none

9. The rate at which the wave changes its phase is called

a. Phase velocity b. Group velocity

c. Particle velaocity d. None

10. The constant β interms of guide wave length λg is

Page 118:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 115

a. β = 2π/ λg b. β = λg/2π c. β = 2π/ λg2 d. β = λg2/2π

11. The phase velocity Vp is given by which of the following

a. Vp = β/ω b. Vp = ω/ β c. Vp = β/ω2 d. None

12. Which of the following gives the cut – off frequency fc

a. fc =C/2 * √ (A/M)2 + (B/N)2

b. fc =C/2 * √ (A/M)2 - (B/N)2

c. fc =C/2 * √ (A/M)2* (B/N)

2 d. None

13. The symmetrical strip lines are also called as

a) Triplates b) diplates c) micro d) none

14. The characteristic impedance of micro strip lines is parameters

a) Width (w) b) Thickness (t)

c) Distance between the line and ground plane (n) d) none

15. What are the losses present in micro strip lines?

a) Attenuation losses b) radiation losses

c) both a and b d) none

16. On, which of the following, does radiation losses of a

a) Frequency b) substrate thickness c) dielectric constant d) both b & c

17. The Unsymmetrical strip lines are also called as

a) Triplates b) diplates c) micro d) none

18. The micro strip lines have losses due to openness of the

a) lower radiation losses b) higher radiation losses

c) Lower attenuation losses d) higher attenuation losses

19. The empirical relation for effective dielectric constant

a) €re = 0.475 €r -0.67 b) €re = 0.475 €r +0.67

c) €re = 0.67€r - 0.475 d) 0.67€r + 0.475

Page 119:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 116

20. The quality factor Q of a micro strip lines is in terms of θ

a) Q=1/ tanθ b) Q= tanθ c) Q= sinθ d) none

21. The resonator works on the principle of resonance

a) Rectangular cavity resonator b) circular c) both a& b d) none

22. A microstrip line of alumina substrate with er = 9 has a zero thickness strip of width. w

= 3mmSubstrate thickness h = 0.5mm. Assuming TEM wave propagation and negligible

fringing field, the characteristic impedance of the line will be approximately :

a) 10 ohm b) 21 ohm c) 26 ohm d) 50 ohm

UNIT-II

1. For transferring energy efficiently between the wave guide used

a. Coupling probes b. Coupling loops c. Both A & B d. None

2. For obtaining TE 10 mode the coupling probe is placed shorted end opf wave guide

a. λg b. λg/4 c. λg/2 d. λg/8

3. The coupling probe is placed at the center of the broad elctric field

a. Maximum b. Minimum c. Zero d. None

4. wave guide irisis are also called as

a. windows b. appertures c. both A and B d. none

5. which of the following are the types of irisis possible

a. inductive irisis b. resistive irisis c. capacitive irisis d. both A and C

6. The inductive is placed in a posistion where the magnetic field is relatively

a. Stong, weak b. Weak, strong c. Stong, strong d. Weak ,weak

7. The capacitive irisis is placed in a position where the elctric field is

a. Strong b. Weak c. Zero d. None

Page 120:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 117

8. When tuning post is placed up to less than λg/4

a. Capcitively b. Inductively c. Resistively d. None

9. When tuning post is insreted to a depth of λg/4 in a wave guide

a. Parallel resonance circuit b. Series resonance circuit c. A & B d. None

10. when the tuning post is placed at a depth greater than λg/4 it acts as

a. Resistively b. Inductively c. Resistively d. None

11. An adjustble post is called as

a. Screw b. Slug c. Both A and B d. None

12. For which of the following purpose attenuators are used

a. Measuring power gain or loss in dB b. To provide isolation

c. To reduce power input to a particular stage to prevent over d. All the above

13. which of the following are the types of attenuators

a. Fixed type b. Variable type c. Both A & B d. None

14. Which of the following attenuators provides fixed amount of

a. Fixed type b. Variable type c. Both A & B d. None

15. which of the following are the types of variable attenuators

a. Flap type b. Vane type c. Rotary type d. None

16. The fixed amounts of phase shifts can be obtained by

a. Using resistive irisis or inductive irisis

b. Reducing wider dimension of rectangular wave guide

c. Inserting di- electric rods across the diameters of a circular d. All the above

17. W hich of the following are the types of phase shifters are present

Page 121:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 118

a. Di electric vane b. Rotary phase

c. Ferrite phase d. All

18. The rectangular slot along the width of a main wave guide is cut for

a. E plane Tee junction b. H plane Tee junction

c. Magic Tee junction d. None

19. T he rectangular slot is cut along the broader dimension of long wave

a. E plane Tee junction b. H plane Tee junction

c. Magic Tee junction d. None

UNIT-III

1. For small size, high frequency coils, the most common core material is

a. Air b. Ferrite c. Powdered iron d. Steel

2. The Q of a radio coil

a. Is independent of frequency b. Increases monotonically as frequency increases

c. Decreases monotonically as frequency increases

d. Increases up to a certain frequency and then decreases beyond that frequency

3. High frequency inductors and capacitors are commonly plated with silver. The main

purpose of this isto

a. Reduce their dc resistance b. Reduce their ac resistance

c. Increase their dc resistance d. Increase their ac resistance

4. The maximum power that handled by ferrite component is limited by

a. saturation magnetization b. line width

c. curie temperature d. gyro magnetic resonance

5. The unitary property of s helps to check

a. power balance of lossless structure b. frequency of lossless structure

c. impedance of lossy structure d. power balance of lossy structure

Page 122:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 119

6. Two port device which is used to separate generator and load

a. Directional coupler b. Magic tee c. Rat race ring d.isolator

7. Under perfect matched condition the diagonal elements of s matrix are

a. unity b. zero c. finite d.infinite

8.The gyrator gives a phase shift of

a. 180 b. 30 c. 60 d. 90

9. Ferrite material losses its magnetic properties at temperature called as

a.500

c b. 250

c c. curie temperature d.cut in temperature

10. There is a mismatch at any two ports of E plane tee,the vswr at the mismatch port is

angle in degrees from an electro magnetic wave passing from quartz into air is

a.1 b.3 c.0

11. The ferrite slab is placed in a isolator in such a way that while transmission it encounters a

polarization of

a. negative elliptical b. negative circular c. positive circular d. positive elliptical

12. Indicate false statement, mangenese ferrites may be used as

A a. isolator b. circulator c. phase shifter d.

garnet

13.One of the following is ferrite

a.MnFe2o3 b.MnFe2O2 c. ZnFe2O d. ZnFe2O3

14. The TWT ……. than multicavity klystron :

a. has a greater bandwidth b. is more efficient

c. has a higher number of modes d. produces a higher output power

15. Strapping is used in magnetron to :

a. prevent mode jumping b. ensure bunching

c. improve the phase focussing effect d. prevent cathode back heating

Page 123:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 120

16 Helix is used in a travelling wave tube to :

a. ensure broadband operation b. reduce the noise figure

c. reduce the axial velocity of the RF field d None

17. In the TWT the attenuator is used to :

a. prevent saturation b. increase gain

c. prevent oscillation d. help bunching

18. Electronically adjustable oscillating frequency over wide range is possible in :

a. coaxial magnetron b . dither – tuned magnetron c. VTM d. None

19. In a TWT glass tube aquadag is used to :

a. help focusing b. provide attenuation c. improve bunching d. increase gain

20. Which is not a TWT slow wave structure :

a. coupled cavity b. helixc. c.ring bars d. periodic permanent magnet

21. In a TWT, the phase velocity of the axial component of the RF field on the slow wave

structure is kept :

a. equal to the velocity of the electrons

b. slightly less than the velocity of electrons

c. slightly more than the velocity of electrons

d. equal to the velocity of light in free space

22. To overcome difficulties with strapping high frequencies the type of cavity structure

desired for magnetron is :

a. hole and slot b. slot c. rising sun d. vane

23.TWT is at times preferred to magnetron for used in RADAR transmitter because it :

a. is more efficient amplifier b. has broader band

c. is less noisy d. is capable of larger duty cycle

Page 124:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 121

24.Backward wave oscillator is based on :

a. cross field amplifier b. coaxial magnetron

c. travelling wave tube d. rising sun magnetron

25. The TWT is used as low noise RF amplifier in

a. Broad band b. Narrow band c. A and B d. None

26. The TWT come under which of the following type

a. ‘O’ Type b. ‘M’ type c. ‘N’ type d. None

27. The TWT’s make use of which of the following

a. Slow wave structures b. Non re entrance cavities

c. Both A & B d. Reluctant cavities

28. The slow wave structures are used to the velacity tube

a. Reduce b. Increase c. Twice d. none

29. Which of the following diagram is used for helix structure

a. W-β diagram b. Brillieuin diagram c. A & B d. Reike diagram

UNIT-IV

1. The equation of the convention current ‘I‘

a. Circuit b. Electronic equation c. Current equation d. None

2. the equation of the axtl electric field ‘E’ is called as

a. Circuit equation b. Electronic equation

c. Current equation d. Volatge equation

3. The amplitude of forward wave corresponding to

a. Remains constant b. Grows exponentially c. Decays exponentially d. Varies linearly

Page 125:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 122

4. The output power gain Ap is given as

a. Ap = -9.54-47.3NC dB b. Ap = +9.54-47.3NC

dB c. Ap = -9.54+47.3NC dB d. Ap = +9.54+47.3NC

dB

5. The range of input power foer which the out put power is called as

a. Over driving capability b. Cut off Range c. Active region d. None

6. Which of the following type of Magnetron makes between two anode segments

a. Cyclotron frequency b. Travelling Wave c. Split Anode d. None

7. The split anode magnetron is useful only at frequency

a. Less than 500 MHz b. Greater Than 500

MHz c . Equals to 500 MHz d. UHF Range

8. In which of the following Magnetrons the travelling electromagnetic field

a. Cyclotron frequency Magnetron b. Travelling Wave Magnetron

c. Split Anode Magnetron d. Negative resistance type

9. which of the following Magnetron gives high frequency

a. Cyclotron frequency Magnetron b. Travelling Wave Magnetron

c. Split Anode Magnetron d. Negative resistance type

10. The phase velocity along the wall of helix in f given as, ---- for very small pitch angle

a. Vp = 102

/β b. Vp = β/10 c. Vp = ω/β d. Vp = ω/β2

11. In cross field tubes the di- electric field and magnetic field are

a. Parallel b. Perpendicular c. A & B d. None

12. Whioch of the following characteristics of helix have broad band operation

a. Constant for range of frequency b. Changed linearly

c. A & B d. None

13. The split anode magnetron is useful only at frequency

Page 126:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 123

a. Less than 500 MHz b. Greater Than 500 MHz

c. Equals to 500 MHz d. UHF Range

14. An amplifier uses step recovery diode for low level noise performance in the :

a) S- band b) C – band c) X – band d) L – band

15. Negative resistance region is not found in :

a) Tunnel diode b) Gunn diode c) Impatt diode d) Backward diode

16. Diode which is used for microwave power switching, limiting and modulation is :

a) crystal diode b) schottky barrier diode c) backward diode d) PIN diode

17. For very low power oscillators, the diode suited is :

a) Gunn b) Avalanche c) Tunnel d) IMPATT

18. Material in which transferred electron bulk effect is observed is:

a) Germanium b) Silicon c) Gallium Arsenide d) Metal semiconductor junctions

19. A step recovery diode is best suited for :

a) low order frequency multiplication b)high order frequency multiplication

c) frequency addition d) None

20. Diode which uses a high doping level to provide a narrow junction :

a) Gunn diode b) Tunnel diode c) IMPATT diode d) None

21. Diode in which negative resistance occurs due to the transfer of electrons to a less

mobile energy level is :

a) Gunn diode b) Tunnel diode c) IMPATT d) None

22. Gunn diodes are made of gallium arsenide because it :

a) has a suitable empty energy band b) has a lower noise

Page 127:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 124

c) has a higher ion mobility d) is capable of handling power densities

23. Snap off varactor is another name of :

a) PIN diode b) Step recovery diode c) Avalanche diode d) Schottky barrier diode

24. One of the following is called hot electron diode :

a) Schottky barrier diode b) Varactor diode c) PIN diode d) None

25. The noise performance of parametric amplifier is improved by:

a) cooling b) using low value of resistance c) heating d) None

26.Cooling is done in a ruby maser amplifier :

a) as it generates a lot of heat b) to increase bandwidth

c) it cannot work at room temperature d) to improve noise performance

27. Advantage of BJT over FET at high frequencies is that :

a) BJT are less noisy b) BJT lend themselves more readily to integration

c) BJT are capable of high gains d) None

28. The diode which has high efficiency than IMPATT is :

a) TRAPATT diode b) Tunnel diode c) Gunn diode d) None

29. Highest pulsed power output is obtained by :

a) Varactor b) Gunn c) RIMPATT d) Schottky barrier

* For Operating At The Highest Frequencies A Microwave Transistor

Does Not Required

a) high collector voltage b) high collector current c) thin base d) large emitter area

30. What is the common characteristics of all the active devises

a. Sportive resistance b. Negative resistance c. Zero resistance d. None

31. In a positive resistance device the current through the resistance are

Page 128:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 125

a. In phase b. Out of phase by 180 c. Out of pahse by 90 d. Out of phase by 45

32. In a negative resistance device the current and voltage are

a.Out of pahse by 90 b. Out of phase by 180 c. Out of phase by 45 d. In phase

33. The positive resistance power where as negative resistances _ power

a. Absorb, absorb b. Genarate, generate c. Genarate, absorb d. Absorb, generate

34. Which of the following comes under solid state microwave

a. Microwave FETs b. Traffered Electron devices

c. Avalanche tranmit time device d. All the above

35. Which of the following is not a transferred electron device

a. L S A Device b.Gunn Diode c.Read Diode d.Inp Diode

36. Which of the following come under transferred electron device

a. L S A Device b. Gunn Diode c. Cadmium telluride diode d. All the above

37. Whioch of the following is not an avalanche transit time device

a. L S A Device b. Gunn Diode c. Cadmium telluride diode d. None

38. Which of the following come under avalanche transit time device

a. Read Diode b. IMPATT diode c. BARRTTDiode d. All the above

39. Which of the following are the advantages of transferred electron device

a. Low power supply b. Low noise c. High gain d. All the above

40. Which of the following are the advantages offered by IMPATT diode

a. Less reliable b. Low cost c. Low CW power out put d. All the above

41. Which of the following are the advantages of BARRTT diode

a. Low Cost b. Low noise c. Low power supply d. All the above

Page 129:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 126

42. The Electrons in the lower value of cvonduction band show

a. LOW EFFECTIVE Mass b. High mobilty c. Both A & B d. None

43. The electrons in upper value of conduction band show

a. high effective noise b. Low mobility c. Both A & B d. None

44. How does the speciman length effect theperiod of oscillation

a. Inversly b. Density c. Exponentially d. None

45. Beyaond the threshold value of elctric field, drift velocity

a. Increased b. Decreased c. Constant d. None

46. Which of the following are modes of negative different

a. Voltage controlled mode b. Current controlled mode c. A & B d. None

47. How does domain length effect the doping

a. Inversely b. Directly c. Does not effect d. None

48. The currecnt density j proportional to

a. Current “I” b. Resistance’R’ c. Volatge ‘V’ d. None

49. In a positive differential resistance region the current density field -------

a. Increases, Increases b. Increases, decreases

c. decreases, Increases d. decreases, decreases

UNIT-V

1. At low frequency the circuits make use of what type

a. Lumped b. Distributed c. Placed in parallel d. None

2. wich of the following are types of cavity meters

a. Absorbtion type b. Transmission type c. A & B d. None

Page 130:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 127

3. Which of the following are the precaution to be taken for wave bench

a. Coupling eeror s must be avoided

b. Errors due to frequency instabilty must be avoided

c. Cooling fans must be placed properly d. All the above

4. Which of the following technique is used for measure

a. calorimatric technique b. bolometer technique

c. Calorie matric watt meter d. Both A & C

5. Which of the following devices come under bolometer

a. Barretters b. Thermistors c. A&B d. None

6. Barretters have ----- temperature co – efficient

a. Positive, Positive b. Positive, negative

c. negative , Positive d. Negative, ,negative

7. Bolo meter produces a current which is proportional to

a. Power b. Power2

c. Voltage d. Inverse of voltage

8. The measurement of attenuation can be done by using methods

a. Power ratio metho b. RF substitution method c. A & B d. None

9. The main drawback of power ratio method of attenuation what characteistics of power measurred

a. Non linear b. Linear c. Constant d. None

10. In RF substitution method calibration precision attenuation amount of

a. Amplification b. Attenuation c. Loss d. None

11. The measurement of frequency is done using which of the following

a. electronic technics b. mechanical techniques c. A & B d. None

12. Which of the following cavities are used for measuring meter technique

a. Transmissive cavities b. Absobtion cavities c. A & B d. None

Page 131:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 128

13. The absorption cavities ........ the signal frequency

a. Allows passing b. Attenuates c. Amplifies d. None

14. The transmission cavities the signal frequency

a. Allows passing b. Attenuates c. Amplifies d. None

15. The wave meter technique is useful for measuring the frequency

a. 4 GHz to 8 GHz b. 12.5 GHZ – 16.5 Ghz

c. 4 GHz to 16.5 GHz d. 8 GHz to 12.5 GHz

16. Which of the following method sare used for measurement

a. Using slotted line b. Using reflectrometer

c. Using Magic TEE d. All the above

17. The bolometer technique is used for measurement of range

a. 0.1mW to 10mW b. 0.01 mW to 0.1 mW c. 0.01 mW to 10 mW d. None

18. The in accuracy in bolometer method is due to

a. Bolometer b. Linear c. Constant d. None

19. For full scale deflection of 10 m volts the VSWR corresponds to 5

mVolts is a. 1 b. 2 c.3 d.4

Page 132:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 129

4.1 OVERVIEW COURSE:

This course ,Computer Networks fully discussed about network connections. It is a

digital telecommunications network which allows nodes to share resources. In computer

networks, computing devices exchange data with each other using connections (data-links) between

nodes. These data links are established over cable media such as wires or optic cables, or wireless

media such as WiFi. It supports an enormous number of applications and services such as access

to the World Wide Web(WWW), Digital Video & Audio, shared use of Applications

4.2 PRE-REQUISITES:

C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION SEM

1

COMPUTER

ORGANIZATION &

OPERATING

SYSTEMS

Knowledge of communicating

with I/O devices and Operating

system

III-I

2 COMPUTER

NETWORKS

Knowledge of various layers of

OSI models and network

protocols.

IV-I

3

WIRELESS

COMMUNICATION

NETWORKS

Knowledge of theoretical and

practical wireless media IV-II

PROGRAMME: B.Tech ECE

AC:YEAR: 2018-2019

DEGREE: B.TECH IV YEAR

COURSE: COMPUTER NETWORKS SEMESTER: I CREDITS: 4

COURSE COORDINATOR: Ms. S.

SUMAN

COURSE CODE: A70515

REGULATION:R15

COURSE TYPE: REGULAR

COURSE AREA/DOMAIN: ECE CONTACT HOURS: 4 hours/Week.

CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE :

A70499

LAB COURSE NAME:MICROWAVE

ENGINEERING AND DIGITAL

COMMUNICATIONS LAB

Page 133:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 130

4.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and

objective type tests.

The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration.

Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to

answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks.

The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes

duration. It consists of 10 multiple choice and 10 objective

type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and

each carries half mark.

First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two

and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination

shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments.

There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks

shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments

in each course.

75 100

4.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 80minutes 20

2 I Assignment - 5

3 II Mid Examination 80minutes 20

4 II Assignment - 5

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

4.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES & OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms

Level

To introduce the

fundamental various types

of computer networks

Students should understand and explore the basics

of Computer Networks and Various Protocols.

BL 2,3,4

To demonstrate the TCP/IP

and OSI models with merits

and demerits

He / She will be in a position to understand the

World Wide Web concepts.

BL 2,3,4

Page 134:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 131

To explore the various

layers of OSI Model

Students will be in a position to administrate a

network and flow of information.

BL 1,2,4

To introduce UDP and TCP

Models

Further he/ she can understand easily the concepts

of network security, Mobile and ad hoc networks.

BL 1,2,4

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

4.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by Blooms Level

A An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics,

science and engineering S

Solving Text

book

Problems

APPLY

B An ability to design and conduct experiments,

as well as to analyze and interpret data S

Solving Gate

and Text

book

Problems

APPLY

C

An ability to design a system, component, or

process to meet desired needs within realistic

constraints such as economic, environmental,

social, political, ethical, health and safety,

manufacturability and sustainability.

H

Assignment

and

Gate

questions

Apply and

Analyze

D An ability to identify, formulate and solve

engineering problems. S

Class Test &

Group

Activity

Apply

E

An ability to use the techniques, skills, and

modern engineering tools necessary for

engineering practice.

S

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

F

An ability to understand the special duty they

owe to protect the public’s health, safety and

welfare by virtue of their professional status as

engineers in society.

N -- --

G

An ability to understand and correctly interpret

the impact of engineering solutions in global,

societal and environmental contexts and

demonstrate the knowledge of a need for

sustainable development.

H

Mini / Micro

Projects and

GATE

questions

Analyze and

Justify

H An understanding of professional and ethical

responsibility. N -- --

I

An ability to function effectively as an

individual, and as a member or leader in

diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

S Class Test &

Seminar Analyze

Page 135:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 132

J

An ability to communicate effectively on

complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at

large, such as, being able to comprehend and

write effective reports and design

documentation, make effective presentations,

give and receive clear instructions.

S Seminars Understand &

Analyze

K

An ability to demonstrate knowledge and

understanding of the engineering finance and

management principles as a member and leader

in a team to manage projects in multi-

disciplinary environments.

S

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

L Recognition of the need for, and an ability to

engage in life-long analyzing. S

Group

Activity Analyze

M

An ability to design and implement projects in

the areas including Signal Processing,

Microwaves, Communication Systems, IC

Technology and Embedded Systems.

H

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

N

An ability to use knowledge in various domains

to identify research gaps and hence to provide

solution to new ideas and innovations.

S Seminars &

Projects Analyze & Apply

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

4.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I:

Overview of the internet: Protocol, Layering Scenario, Layering Scenario, TCP/IP Protocol Suite:

The OSI Model, Internet history standards and administration; Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP

reference model.

Physical Layer: Guided transmission media, wireless transmission media. Data Link Layer- design

issues, CRC Codes, Elementary Data link Layer protocols, sliding window protocol.

UNIT-II

Multiple Access Protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, Collision free protocols, Ethernet- Physical Layer,

Ethernet Mac Sub Layer, data link layer switching & use of bridges, Learning bridges, spanning

tree bridges, repeaters, hubs, bridges, switches, routers and gateways.

UNIT-III

Network Layer: Network Layer Design issues, store and forward packet switching connection

less and connection oriented network- routing algorithms- optimality principle, shortest path,

flooding, Distance Vector Routing, Count to Infinity Problem, Hierarchical Routing, Congestion

control algorithms, admission control.

Page 136:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 133

UNIT-IV

Internetworking: Tunnelling, Internetwork Routing, Packet fragmentation, IPv4, Ipv6 Protocol,

IP addresses, CIDR, IMCP, ARP, RARP, DHCP.

Transport Layer: Services provided to the upper layers elements of transport protocol-addressing

connection establishment, connection release, Crash recovery.

UNIT-V

Internet Transport Protocols: UDP-RPC, Real Time Transport Protocols, The Internet Transport

Protocols- Introduction to TCP, The TCP Service Model, The TCP Segment Header, The Connection

Establishment, The TCP Connection Release, The TCP Connection Management Modeling, The TCP

Sliding Window, The TCP Congestion Control, The future of TCP.

Application Layer: Introduction, providing services, Application layer paradigms, Client server

model, Standard client-server application- HTTP, FTP, electronic mail, TELNET, DNS, SSH.

TEXT BOOK:

1. Data Communications and Networking – Behrouz A. Forouzan, Fifth Edition TMH, 2013.

2. Computer Networks – Andrew S Tanenbaum, 4th

Edition, Pearson Education.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks- S. Keshav, 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education.

2. Understanding communications and Networks, 3rd

Edition, W.A.Shay, Cengage Learning.

3. Introduction to Computer Networks and Cyber Security, Chwan-Hwa(John) Wu, J. David

4. Irwin, CRC Press.

5. Computer Networks, L.L. Peterson and B.S.Davie, 4th

edition, ELSEVIER.

6. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Jmaes F. Kurose, K.W.

7. Ross, 3rd

Edition, Pearson Education.

4.8 COURSE PLAN:

Lecture

Number Unit Topics to be Covered Reference

1 I Overview of the internet: Introduction to

Computer Networks A1,A3

2 I Protocol A1,A3

3 I Layering Scenario A1,A3

4 I TCP/IP Protocol Suite A1,A3

5-6 I OSI Model A1,A3

7 I Internet History Standards and Administration A1,A3

Page 137:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 134

8 I Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP Reference

Model A1,A3

9 I Physical Layer: Introduction A1,A3

10 I Guided Transmission Media A1,A3

11 I Wireless Transmission Media A1,A3

12-13 I Data Link Layer-Design Issues A1,A3

14 I CRC Codes A1,A3

15 I Elementary Data Link Layer Protocols A1,A3

16-19 I Sliding Window Protocol A1,A3

20 I Revision A1,A3

21 II Multiple Access Protocols: Introduction A1,A3

22 II ALOHA A1,A3

23 II CSMA A1,A3

24 II Collision Free Protocols A1,A3

25 II Ethernet Mac Sub Layer A1,A3

26-27 II Data Link Layer Switching & Use of Bridges A1,A3

28 II Learning Bridges A1,A3

29 II Spanning Tree Bridges A1,A3

30 II Repeaters A1,A3

31-32 II Hubs, Bridges A1,A3

33 II Switches, Routers and Gateways A1,A3

34 II Revision A1,A3

35 III Network Layer: Introduction A1,A3

36-37 III Network Layer Design Issues A1,A3

38 III

Store and Forward Packet Switching Connection

Less and Connection Oriented Networks-

Routing Algorithms

A1,A3

39 III Optimality Principle A1,A3

40 III Shortest Path A2

41-42 III Flooding, Distance Vector Routing A2

43 III Count to Infinity Problem A2

44 III Hierarchical Routing A2

45-46 III Congestion Control Algorithms A2

47 III Admission Control A2

48 III Revision A2

49 IV Internetworking: Introduction A2

50 IV Tunneling A2

51 IV Internetwork Routing A2

52 IV Packet Fragmentation A2

53 IV IPv4, IPv6 Protocol A2

54 IV IP Addresses A2

55 IV CIDR, IMCP A2

56 IV ARP, RARP A2

57 IV DHCP

58 IV Transport Layer: Introduction

59 IV Services Provided To The Upper Layers

Elements of Transport Protocol

60 IV Addressing Connection Establishment

61 IV Connection Release and Crash Recovery

Page 138:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 135

62 V The Internet Transport Protocols: UDP-RPC

63 V Real Time Transport Protocols

64 V Introduction to TCP

65 V The TCP Service Model

66 V The TCP Segment Header A2

67 V The Connection Establishment

68 V The TCP Connection Release

69 V The TCP Connection Management Modelling

70 V The TCP Sliding Window

71 V The TCP Congestion Control

72 V Future of TCP

73 V Application Layer-Introduction

74 V Providing Services

75 V Application Layer Paradigms

76 V Client Server Model

77 V Standard Client-Server Application

78 V HTTP,FTP

79 V Electronic Mail, TELNET

80 V DNS, SSH

4.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Course Outcomes

a b c d e

I S

II S S

III H

IV H S

V S

S= Supportive H= Highly Related

4.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n

a S

b S S S S S

c S S

Page 139:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 136

d S S S H S

e S S S S S S

S= Supportive H= Highly Related

QUESTION BANK

Unit-I

OVERVIEW OF THE INTERNET, PHYSICAL LAYER & DATA-LINK LAYER

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

S.No Question Blooms Taxonomy

Level

1. Define Network? Understand

2. Explain different types of networks? Understand

3. Describe Why protocols needed? Apply

4. Describe Access point? Understand

5. State the goals of networks? Understand

6. Describe the importance of networking? Remember

7. List two advantages of layering principle in computer networks? Apply

8. Classify different types of Layers? Apply

9. Define the responsibilities of data link layer? Apply

10. Enumerate the types of errors? Understand

11. Explain the role of ARPANET in computer networks? Apply

12. Discuss two points to improve the performance of network? Apply

13. Define redundancy? Apply

14. Li st different types of Transmission Media? Understand

15. Describe Why are standards needed? Understand

Page 140:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 137

16. Explain briefly about MAN? Understand

17 Explain about Sliding Window Protocol? Understand

18 Explain briefly about WAN? Understand

19 Define peer-to-peer process? Understand

20 Describe an internet? Understand

21 Define Intranet? Understand

22 Define Extranet? Understand

23 Explain briefly about LAN? Understand

24 Describe the advantages of a multipoint connection over a point-

to-point connection? Evaluate

25 List out the available detection methods? Evaluate

26 Discuss the responsibilities of the data link layer in the Internet

model? Evaluate

27 Discuss How do the layers of the Internet model correlate to the

layers of the OSI model? Evaluate

28 Differentiate four basic topologies? Evaluate

29 Define VRC, LRC, and CRC? Understand

30 List the advantages of CN? Understand

31 List the networks Applications? Understand

32 Define checksum? Understand

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. Explain how are OSI and ISO related to each other? Remember

2. Illustrate some of the factors that determine whether a

communication system is a LAN or WAN? Understand

3. List the responsibilities of the data link layer in the Internet

model? Evaluate

4.

Suppose a computer sends a frame to another computer on a

bus topology LAN. The physical destination address of the frame

is corrupted during the transmission. What happens to the frame?

How can the sender be informed about the situation? Explain?

Understand

5. List three types of transmission impairment? Remember

6. Distinguish between baseband transmission and broadband

transmission? Understand

7. Explain the categories of networks? Understand

Page 141:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 138

8. Explain ISO/OSI Reference model with neat diagram? Understand

9. Define topology and explain the topologies of the network? Evaluate

10. Explain error detection and error correction techniques? Evaluate

11. Explain the flow control mechanism? Evaluate

12. Explain about HDLC? Evaluate

13. Explain the timers and time registers in FDDI? Evaluate

14. Explain error control mechanism? Evaluate

15. Explain about SONET and Bridges? Evaluate

UNIT-II

MULTIPLE ACCESS PROTOCOLS:

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define ALOHA? Understand

2 List out advantage of token passing protocol over CSMA/CD

protocol? Understand

3 Define MAC? Understand

4 List the drawbacks of token ring topology? Understand

5 Define Ethernet? Understand

6 Illustrate in what way the MAC protocol of FDDI differs from

that of token ring? Analyze

7 Explain how FDDI offers higher reliability than token ring

protocol? Analyze

8 Explain the two techniques for implementing Ethernet switches? Analyze

9 Define Bridge? Apply

10 Define Hub? Understand

11 Define Router? Understand

12 Explain in what situations contention based MAC protocols are

suitable? Understand

13 Illustrate what is vulnerable period? How it affects the

performance in MAC protocols? Understand

14 List three categories of multiple access protocols? Analyze

15 Define CSMA and CDMA? Evaluate

Page 142:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 139

16 Define parameter ‘a’? How does it affect the performance of the

CSMA protocol? Understand

17 Explain how performance is improved in CSMA/CD protocol

compared to CSMA protocol? Understand

18 Explain how throughput is improved in slotted ALOHA over pure

ALOHA? Understand

19 Explain Vulnerable Time? Understand

20 Distinguish between FDMA and TDMA? Analyze

21 Define Bandwidth? Understand

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 State the functions of MAC? Evaluate

2 How performance is improved in CSMA/CD protocol compared

to CSMA protocol? Explain? Understand

3 How CSMA/CA differs from CSMA/CD. Explain in brief? Understand

4 Explain in details about the access method and frame format used

in Ethernet and token ring? Evaluate

5 Explain the working of carrier sense multiple access protocol? Evaluate

6 Discuss the MAC layer functions of IEEE 802.11? Understand

7 Explain in details the types of bridges? Analyze

8 How a Token Ring LAN does operate? Discuss that can be used

to set up wireless LAN’s? Analyze

9 List and briefly discuss the two different basic transmission

technologies? Understand

10 List the four basic network topologies and explain them giving

all the Relevant features? Evaluate

11 Explain the frame format, operation and ring maintenance feature

of IEEE 802.5 MAC protocol? Evaluate

12 Define key requirements and functioning of wireless LANs? Apply

13 Explain why collision is an issue in a random access protocol but

not in controlled access or channelizing protocols? Understand

14 Compare and contrast a controlled access protocol with a

channelizing protocol? Apply

15 Do we need a multiple access protocol when we use the local loop

of the telephone company to access the internet? Explain? Apply

UNIT-III

NETWORK LAYER

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain Design Issues Of Network layer? Remember

Page 143:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 140

2 List network support layers and the user support layers? Remember

3 Define the functions of LLC? Understand

4 Illustrate shortest path? Understand

5 Define Flooding? Analyze

6 Explain Optimality principle? Analyze

7 Define the functions of MAC? Understand

8 Define protocol data unit? Understand

9 Explain Congestion Control? Understand

10 Define virtual circuit? Understand

11 List out responsibilities of network layer? Analyze

12 Define datagram’s? Understand

13 Explain how broadcast and multicast address is represented in IP

addressing scheme? Analyze

14 List some of the unicast routing protocols? Understand

15 Differentiate between Datagram and datagram networks? Analyze

16 Define routers? Understand

17 Differentiate between virtual circuit and virtual circuit networks? Understand

18 List out functions of IP? Understand

19 Explain what is meant by routing algorithm? Understand

20 Define session routing? Understand

21 Define Flooding? Understand

22 Define Link state Routing? Understand

23 State Leaky bucket? Understand

24 Explain Choke packet? Analyze

25 Define packet switching? Analyze

26 State circuit switching? Analyze

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

Page 144:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 141

1 Define switching? Explain Virtual circuit switching techniques? Understand

2 Explain Packet switching technique in detail? Analyze

3 Explain Internet Protocol with the neat block diagram of IP

header format? Analyze

4 Discuss about Address Resolution Protocol? Evaluate

5 Explain about Internet Control Message Protocol? Evaluate

6 Define BGP Protocol. Describe its routing functionality in detail? Evaluate

7 Write short notes on a) X.25 b) ARP? Evaluate

8 Explain the various congestion control mechanism in detail? Apply

9 Explain the Link State routing algorithm with an example? Apply

10 Describe the Routing Information protocol and Distance vector

routing protocol? Evaluate

11 Explain the Datagram delivery and Forwarding in Internet

Protocol? Understand

12 Explain the two approaches of packet switching techniques? Understand

13 Define Routers and explain the type of routers? Apply

14 Explain IP addressing method? Apply

15 Describe two groups of multicast routing protocols Understand

UNIT-IV

INTERNETWORKING, TRANSPORT LAYER

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 List out functions of transport layer? Understand

2 Define Multi-protocol router? Understand

3 List out duties of the transport layer? Understand

4 Define BGP? Understand

5 Differentiate between network layer delivery and the transport

layer delivery? Understand

6 Define IP Address? Understand

7 Define quality of service? Analyze

8 Explain Subnet Mask? Understand

Page 145:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 142

9 Define PayLoad? Understand

10 Explain how an application process running in one host is

addresses by another process through TCP? Analyze

11 Describe Datagram Format of UDP? Understand

12 Define IMCP? Analyze

13 State two protocols available at transport layer? Evaluate

14 List out various congestion avoidance techniques? Understand

15 Distinguish between Contention and Congestion? Evaluate

16 Define Tunneling? Understand

17 State the four major aspects of reliable delivery at the transport

layer? Understand

18 Explain how check sum is calculated in TCP? Evaluate

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the real transport protocol of UDP and how will you

calculate checksum in UDP? Understand

2 Explain the TCP segment format? Analyze

3 Write short notes on Wrap around time (8)? Understand

4 Describe the Adaptive retransmission policy in detail? Apply

5 Explain the TCP Connection establishment and termination using

Timeline diagram? Apply

6 Describe the three way handshake protocol to establish the

transport level connection? Evaluate

7 Explain TCP state Transition diagram? Evaluate

8 Explain the connection establishment? Understand

9 Discuss about the TCP sliding window algorithm for flow

control? Understand

10 Explain congestion control algorithms in detail? Apply

11 Explain leaky bucket and token bucket algorithm? Apply

12 Explain UDP &TCP? Analyze

13 Explain congestion avoidance techniques in detail? Understand

14 List major types of networks and explain? Analyze

15 Illustrate data units at different layers of the TCP/IP protocol

suite? Apply

Page 146:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 143

UNIT- V

APPLICATION LAYER

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain Internet Transport Protocols? Understand

2 Define UDP? Understand

3 State advantages of stateless server of HTTP? Apply

4 Define message Formatting? Analyze

5 Define TCP? Understand

6 Differentiate between FTP & HTTP? Evaluate

7 Explain TCP segment Header? Analyze

8 Explain Sliding Window Protocol? Understand

9 List two applications of Application Layer ? Apply

10 Explain DNS Name Space? Understand

11 List the advantages of Email? Understand

12 Define SMTP? Understand

13 Explain the concept of Telnet? Understand

14 Define FTP? Understand

15 Explain MIME? Understand

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 List different Data types used for Presentation formatting? Analyze

2 Define two methods of HTTP? Evaluate

3 Define Big-endian format and little-endian format? Analyze

4 Describe the role of the local name server and the authoritative

name server in DNS? Apply

5 Define Domain Name Service (DNS) and explain in detail about

the domain hierarchy and name servers? Understand

6 Explain in detail about the working principles of Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP) ? Evaluate

7 Discuss how the simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is useful

in electronic mail? Understand

Page 147:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 144

8 Describe in detail about the World Wide Web (WWW) ? Analyze

9 Explain the working principle of FTP in detail with neat diagram? Understand

10 Explain the WWW in detail? Understand

11 Differentiate between ARP and RARP? Evaluate

12 Explain the specific purposes of the DNS, HTTP, SMB, and

SMTP/POP application layer protocols? Understand

13 Compare and contrast client/server with peer-to-peer data transfer

over networks? Evaluate

14 Explain three domains of the Domain Name Space? Understand

15 Differentiate between primary server and secondary server? Evaluate

4.11 ASSIGNMENT TOPICS:

UNIT-I

OVERVIEW OF THE INTERNET, PHYSICAL LAYER, DATA-LINK LAYER

S. No Questions Blooms Taxonomy Level

1. Explain ISO/OSI Reference model with neat diagram? Remember

2.

Comparison between TCP/IP Reference model and OSI Reference

model? Understand

3.

Define Physical Layer and Explain the types of Transmission

medias? Understand

4. Briefly explain about Data Link Layer and Design Issues? Understand

5. Explain error detection and error correction techniques? Understand

6. Explain about Elementary Data Link Layer Protocol with its types? Understand

7.

Explain about Sliding Window Protocol theoretically and

practically? Understand

8. Explain about Protocols with its key elements? Evaluate

UNIT II

MULTIPLE ACCESS PROTOCOLS

1. State the functions of MAC? Understand

2.

Explain in details about the access method and frame format used in

Ethernet and token ring? Evaluate

3. How CSMA/CA differs from CSMA/CD. Explain in brief? Evaluate

4.

How performance is improved in CSMA/CD protocol compared to

CSMA protocol? Explain? Understand

5. Discuss the MAC layer functions of IEEE 802.11? Analyze

6. How a Token Ring LAN does operate? Discuss that can be used to Evaluate

Page 148:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 145

set up wireless LAN’s?

7. Explain in details the types of bridges? Evaluate

8.

Explain the frame format, operation and ring maintenance feature

o of IEEE 802.5 MAC protocol? Analyze

9.

Compare and contrast a controlled access protocol with

channelizing protocol? Analyze

10. Define key requirements and functioning of wireless LANs? Understand

UNIT- III

NETWORK LAYER

1. Define switching? Explain Virtual circuit switching techniques? Understand

2. Explain Packet switching technique in detail? Analyze

3. Discuss about Address Resolution Protocol? Analyze

4.

Explain Internet Protocol with the neat block diagram of IP header

format? Evaluate

5. Explain about Internet Control Message Protocol? Understand

6. Write short notes on a) X.25 b) ARP? Understand

7. Explain the various congestion control mechanism in detail? Understand

8. Explain the Link State routing algorithm with an example? Apply

9. Explain the two approaches of packet switching techniques? Apply

10. Define Routers and explain the type of routers? Understand

UNIT- IV

INTERWORKING, TRANSPORT LAYER

1.

Explain the real transport protocol of UDP and how will you

calculate checksum in UDP? Understand, Evaluate

2. Describe the Adaptive retransmission policy in detail? Analyze, Understand

3.

Explain the TCP Connection establishment and termination using

Timeline diagram? Understand

4.

Describe the three way handshake protocol to establish the

transport level connection? Analyze

5. Explain TCP state Transition diagram? Understand

6. Discuss about the TCP sliding window algorithm for flow control? Evaluate

7. Explain congestion control algorithms in detail? Understand

8. Explain leaky bucket and token bucket algorithm? Analyze

9. Illu strate data units at different layers of the TCP/IP protocol suite? Analyze

UNIT-V

APPLICATION LAYER

1. List different Data types used for Presentation formatting? Understand

2. Define two methods of HTTP? Evaluate

3.

Define Domain Name Service (DNS) and explain in detail about the

domain hierarchy and name servers? Understand

Page 149:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 146

4.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT – I

OVERVIEW OF THE INTERNET, PHYSICAL LAYER, DATA-LINK LAYER:

1. Internet access by transmitting digital data over the wires of a local telephone network is provided by

a) leased line

b) digital subscriber line

c) digital signal line

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: b

2. ISP exchanges internet traffic between their networks by

a) internet exchange point

b) subscriber end point

c) ISP end point

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: a

3.Which one of the following protocol is not used in internet?

a) HTTP

b) DHCP

c) DNS

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: d

4.What is internet?

a) a single network

b) a vast collection of different networks

c) interconnection of local area networks

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: b

5. To join the internet, the computer has to be connected to a

4.

Explain in detail about the working principles of Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP) ? Understand

5.

Discuss how the simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is useful in

electronic mail? Understand

6. Describe in detail about the World Wide Web (WWW)? Understand

7. Explain the working principle of FTP in detail with neat diagram? Analyze

8. Explain the WWW in detail? Understand

9. Differentiate between ARP and RARP? Analyze

10.

Explain the specific purposes of the DNS, HTTP, SMB, and

SMTP/POP application layer protocols? Analyze, Understand

11

Compare and contrast client/server with peer-to-peer data transfer

over networks? Analyze

12 Explain three domains of the Domain Name Space? Understand

13 Differentiate between primary server and secondary server? Analyze

Page 150:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 147

a) internet architecture board

b) internet society

c) internet service provider

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: c

7. Internet works on

a) packet switching

b) circuit switching

c) both (a) and (b)

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: a

8. Which one of the following is not an application layer protocol used in internet?

a) remote procedure call

b) internet relay chat

c) resource reservation protocol

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: c

9. Which protocol assigns IP address to the client connected in the internet?

a) DHCP

b) IP

c) RPC

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: a

10. Which one of the following is not used in media access control?

a) ethernet

b) digital subscriber line

c) fiber distributed data interface

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: d

UNIT-2

MULTIPLE ACCESS PROTOCOLS

1. In Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA), if the station senses the medium before

2. trying to use it then the chance of collision can be

A. Increased

B. Reduced

C. Highlighted

D. Both B & C

Answer: B

6) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) differs from Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) because there is no

A. bandwidth

Page 151:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 148

B. link

C. carrier

D. timesharing

Answer: D

3. In Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA), the possibility of collision still exist because of

A. Propagation delay

B. sender-receiver delay

C. Sense delay

D. Transmit delay

Answer: A

4. The protocol that is used to transmit data without any schedule time is

A. random access

B. controlled access

C. channelization

D. none of the above

Answer: A

5. Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) is based on the medium called

A. Listen before talk

B. Listen before sending

C. Sense before transmit

D. Sense before Collision

Answer: C

6. Normally the value of the K-max in pure ALOHA is

A. 5

B. 10

C. 15

D. 20

Answer: C

7. In Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD), the sending station

must Detect

A. Collision

B. Signal

C. Sense

D. Station

Page 152:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 149

Answer: A

8. The Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) method was developed to increase the

A. Collision

B. Performance

C. Transmission

D. Station

Answer: B

9. If the maximum propagation time in Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection

is 25.6

A. 54 bytes

B. 64 bytes

C. 74 bytes

D. 84 bytes

Answer: B

10 A collision of the frames could be the result when a station sends a frame and at the same

time any other station tries to send a

A. Information

B. Frame

C. Station

D. All of the above

Answer: B

11. In polling method, the secondary stations follow its instructions and the primary stations

controls the

A. transmission of frames

B. time delay

C. link

D. signals

Answer: C

12. Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) specifies a predetermined frequency band

for the entire period of

A. Connection

B. Station

Page 153:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 150

C. Communication

D. Channelization

Answer: C

UNIT-3

NETWORK LAYER:

1. Which functionality of the network layer deals with the necessity of a three-way handshake usually

2. before the transmission of data from sender to receiver?

a. Path determination

b. Forwarding

c. Call Set-up

d. All of the above

Answer: C

2. A packet used for the transmission purpose is basically a combination of __________

a. group of bits

b. source & destination address

c. both a & b

d. none of the above

Answer: C

3. Which unit plays a crucial role in carrying out the functions of network layer, simply by the addition

of a header to it ?

a. Network Service Data Unit (NSDU)

b. Medium Access Control Unit (MACU)

c. Network Address Translation Unit (NATU)

d. None of the above

Answer: A

4. Match the classes of IP addresses with their functional applications

A. Class A -------------------- 1) Multicast services

B. Class B -------------------- 2) Reserved for future use

C. Class D -------------------- 3) Large organizations

D. Class E -------------------- 4) Midsize Organizations

a. A- 4, B- 3, C- 2, D- 1

b. A- 2, B- 4, C- 1, D- 3

Page 154:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 151

c. A- 3, B- 4, C- 1, D- 2

d. A- 1, B- 2, C- 3, D- 4

Answer: C

5. Which form of byte assigning strategy is adopted in class B type of network corresponding to IP

addresses?

a. Network.Node.Node.Node

b. Network.Network.Node.Node

c. Network.Network.Network.Node

d. Network.Node.Node.Node

Answer: B

6. On which factors do the size of block depends in classless addressing?

a. Nature & size of an entity

b. Number of addresses

c. Availability of the address space

d. All of the above

Answer: A

7. What are the problems involved in an IP Fragmentation Process?

A. Loss of any fragment results in rejection of all datagrams

B. Management of buffer space is essential to handle reassembly process

C. No necessity of initializing the timer after the reception of initial fragment

D. Multiple attempts can be made to recover ICMP error message due to connection-oriented IP service

a. A & B

b. C & D

c. B& C

d. A & D

Answer: A

8. The ability of a single network to span multiple physical networks is known as ______

a. Subnetting

b. Masking

c. Fragmenting

Page 155:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 152

d. Hopping

Answer: A

9.Which field/s of ICMPv6 packet header has/have a provision of minimal integrity level concerning

to verification for ICMP messages?

a. Type

b. Code

c. Checksum

d. All of the above

Answer: C

11. In the version field of IPv4 header, when the machine is using some other version of IPv4 then

the datagram is

A. Discarded

B. Accepted

C. Interpreted

D. Interpreted incorrectly

Answer: A

12. The network layer at the source is responsible for creating a packet from the data coming from

another

A. Station

B. Link

C. Node

D. Protocol

Answer: D

13. The header of the datagram in the IPv4 has

A. 0 to 20 bytes

B. 20 to 40 bytes

C. 20 to 60 bytes

D. 20 to 80 bytes

Page 156:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 153

Answer: C

14. In the IPv4 layer, the datagram is of

A. Fixed length

B. Variable length

C. Global length

D. 0 length

Answer: B

15. In IPv4, the service type of the service in the header field, the first 3 bits are called

A. Type of service

B. Code bits

C. Sync bits

D. Precedence bits

Answer: D

UNIT-4

INTERNETWORKING, TRANSPORT LAYER:

1.Transport layer aggregates data from different applications into a single stream before passing

it to a) network layer b) data link layer c) application layer d) physical layer

Answer: A

2. Which one of the following is a transport layer protocol used in networking?

a) TCP

b) UDP

c) Both TCP and UDP

d) None of the mentioned

Answer: C

3. User datagram protocol is called connectionless because

a) all UDP packets are treated independently by transport layer

b) it sends data as a stream of related packets

c) it is received in the same order as sent order

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: A

Page 157:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 154

4. Transmission control protocol is

a) connection oriented protocol

b) uses a three way handshake to establish a connection

c) receives data from application as a single stream

d) all of the mentioned

Answer: D

5. An endpoint of an inter-process communication flow across a computer network is called

a) socket

b) pipe

c) port

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: A

6. Socket-style API for windows is called

a) w sock

b) w insock

c) wins

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: B

7. Which one of the following is a version of UDP with congestion control?

a) datagram congestion control protocol

b) stream control transmission protocol

c) structured stream transport

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: A

8. A _____ is a TCP name for a transport service access point.

a) port

b) pipe

c) node

d) none of the mentioned

Answer: A

9. Transport layer protocols deals with

a) application to application communication

b) process to process communication

c) node to node communication

d) none of the mentioned

Page 158:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 155

Answer: B

10. Which one of the following is a transport layer protocol?

a) stream control transmission protocol

b) internet control message protocol

c) neighbor discovery protocol

d) dynamic host configuration protocol

Answer: A

11. Which statement is true regarding classless routing protocols?

a) The use of discontinuous networks is not allowed

b) The use of variable length subnet masks is permitted

c) RIPv1 is a classless routing protocol

d) RIPv2 supports classless routing

Answer: B

12. What is route poisoning?

a) It sends back the protocol received from a router as a poison pill, which stops the regular updates.

The use of variable length subnet masks is permitted

b) It is information received from a router that can’t be sent back to the originating router.RIPv2

supports classless routing

c) It prevents regular update messages from reinstating a route that has just come up

d) It describes when a router sets the metric for a downed link to infinity

Answer: D

UNIT-5 APPLICATION LAYER:

2. The packet of information at the application layer is called

a) Packet

b) Message

c) Segment

d) Frame

Answer: B

3. This is one of the architecture paradigm

a) Peer to peer

Page 159:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 156

b) Client-server

c) HTTP

d) Both Peer-to-Peer & Client-Server

Answer: D

4. Application developer has permission to decide the following on transport layer side

a) Transport layer protocol

b) Maximum buffer size

c) Both Transport layer protocol and Maximum buffer size

d) None of the mentioned

Answer: C

5. Application layer offers _______ service

a) End to end

b) Process to process

c) Both End to end and Process to process

d) None of the mentioned

Answer: A

6. E-mail is

a) Loss-tolerant application

b) Bandwidth-sensitive application

c) Elastic application

d) None of the mentioned

Answer: C

7. Pick the odd one out

a) File transfer

b) File download

c) E-mail

d) Interactive games

Answer: D

8. The ____________ translates internet domain and host names to IP address.

a) domain name system

b) routing information protocol

c) network time protocol

d) internet relay chat

Page 160:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 157

Answer: A

8. Which one of the following allows a user at one site to establish a connection to another site and

then pass keystrokes from local host to remote host?

a) HTTP

b) FTP

c) Telnet

d) None of the mentioned

Answer: C

10. Application layer protocol defines

a) types of messages exchanged

b) message format, syntax and semantics

c) rules for when and how processes send and respond to messages

d) all of the mentioned

Answer: D

11. Which one of the following protocol delivers/stores mail to reciever server?

a) simple mail transfer protocol

b) post office protocol

c) internet mail access protocol

d) hypertext transfer protocol

Answer: A

12. The ASCII encoding of binary data is called

a) base 64 encoding

b) base 32 encoding

c) base 16 encoding

d) base 8 encoding

Answer: A

13. Which one of the following is an internet standard protocol for managing devices on IP network?

a) dynamic host configuration protocol

b) simple network management protocol

c) internet message access protocol

d) media gateway protocol

Answer: B

Page 161:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 158

CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS:

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code : A70434

Course Title :

Cellular and Mobile Communications

Course Structure : Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits

4 - - 4

Course Coordinator : DR.K V MURALI MOHAN

Team of Instructors :

5.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

Detail knowledge on cellular mobile radio systems, different fading in radio Systems, Elements of

Cellular Radio system design, Co-channel interference and Non- co channel interference. Briefing cell

coverage for signal and traffic , cell sir and mobile antennas , Near and long distance propagation and

path loss from point to point prediction model in different Conditions. After the course one can get

knowledge on Handoff and Dropped cell concepts and Frequency management and channel assignment

5.2 PREREQUISITE(S):

Level Credits Periods / Week Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Analog and digital communications

Page 162:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 159

5.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks

University

End Exam

Marks

Total Marks

There shall be two mid tem examinations. Each Mid-term

exam consists of subjective type and objective type test. The

subjective test is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour.

Subjective test of each semester shall contain four questions;

the student has to answer two out of them. Each carrying 5

marks

The objective test paper Is prepared by JNTUH, which

consists of 20 questions each carrying 0.5 marks and total of

10 marks.

The student is assessed by giving two assignments, one,

after completion of

75

100

5.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

5.3.1 Basic Cellular Mobile System, Uniqueness of mobile radio environment-

Long term fading, Factors influencing short term fading, Parameters of mobile

multipath fading.

5.3.2 Concept of frequency reuse, Co-channel Interference, Co-channel

Interference Reduction Factor,

5.3.3 Design of Antenna system.

Effects of cell site components, UHF TV interference..

All the setup channels carries only

a) header information b) data information

c) address information d) handoff information

In a cell how many set up channels are generally present

a) 32 b) 21 c) 53 d) any number

S.No. Component Duration Marks

(a) I Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

(b) I Assignment - 05

(c) II Mid Examination 90 minutes 20

(d) II Assignment - 05

(e) External Examination 3 hours 75

Page 163:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 160

The process channel can be designed by as a channel apart from set up channels in the cell site

a) BSC b) PSTN c) MTSO d) control room

5.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

S. No. Outcome Level Proficiency

assessed by

A.

An ability to apply knowledge of Science,

Mathematics, Engineering & Computing

fundamentals for the solutions of Complex

Engineering problems.

N

-

B.

An ability to identify, formulates, research literature and analyze

complex engineering problems using first principles of

mathematics and engineering sciences

N

-

C. An ability to design solutions to complex process or program to

meet desired needs

S Interactive

discussions

D. Ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods

including design of experiments to provide valid conclusions S

Assigning

&Exercises

E. An ability to use appropriate techniques, skills and tools

necessary for computing practice

S Exercises

and

assignments

F.

Ability to apply reasoning informed by the contextual

knowledge to assess social issues, consequences &

responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice

N

-

G.

Ability to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a

global, economic, environmental, and societal context with

sustainability

N -

H. An understanding of professional, ethical, social issues and

responsibilities

S Exercises and

assignments

I. An ability to function as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams and in multidisciplinary settings

H

Assignments

, Tutorials,

Exams

J. An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering

activities within the engineering community S

Oral

Discussions.

K.

Ability to demonstrate and understanding of the engineering and

management principles as a member and leader in a team

H

Exams,

Seminars,

Document

Preparation

and

Presentation.

L. Ability to engage in independent and lifelong learning in the

context of technological change

H Exercises and

Assignments

Page 164:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 161

5.6 JNTUH SYLLABUS:

UNIT I:

Introduction to Cellular Mobile Radio Systems:

Limitations of conventional mobile telephone systems, Basic Cellular Mobile System, First,

Second, third and fourth generation cellular wireless systems, Uniqueness of mobile radio

environment- Fading- Time dispersion parameters, Coherence bandwidth, Doppler spread and

coherence time.

Fundamentals of Cellular Radio System Design:

Concept of frequency reuse, Co-channel Interference, Co-channel Interference Reduction

Factor, Desired C/I from a normal case in an Omni directional antenna system, System

capacity, Trunking and grade of service, Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems-

Cell splitting, Sectoring.

UNIT II:

Co-channel Interfere

Measurement of real time Co-Channel interference, Design of Antenna system, Antenna

parameters and their effects, Diversity techniques- Space diversity, Polarization diversity,

Frequency diversity, Time diversity.

Non-Co-Channel Interference:

Adjacent channel interference, Near end- far end interference, Cross talk, Effects on

coverage and interference by power decrease, Antenna height decrease, Effects of cell site

components.

UNIT III:

Cell Coverage for Signal and Traffic:

Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain, Effect of human made structures, Phase difference

between direct and reflected paths, Constant standard deviation, Straight line path loss slope,

General formula for mobile propagation over water and flat open area, Near and long distance

propagation, Path loss from a point to point prediction model in different conditions, merits of

Lee model.

Page 165:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 162

CELL SITE AND MOBILE ANTENNAS:

Space diversity antennas, Umbrella pattern antennas, Minimum separation of cell site antennas,

mobile antennas.

UNIT IV:

Frequency Management and Channel Assignment:

Numbering and grouping, Setup access and paging channels, Channel assignments to cell sites

and mobile units, Channel sharing and borrowing, Sectorization, Overlaid cells, Non fixed

channel assignment.

UNIT V:

Handoff and Dropped Calls:

Handoff initiation, Types of handoff, Delaying handoff, Advantages of handoff, Power

difference handoff, Forced handoff, Mobile assisted and soft handoff. Intersystem handoff,

Introduction to dropped call rates and their evaluation.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications – W.C.Y. Lee, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edn., 1989.

2. Wireless Communications - Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson education, 2nd Edn., 2002.

3. Mobile Cellular Communication – Gottapu Sashibhushana Rao, Pearson, 2012

REFERENCES:

1. Principles of Mobile Communications – Gordon L. Stuber, Springer International 2nd

Edition, 2001.

2. Modern Wireless Communications- Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, Pearson Education, 2005.

3. Wireless Communication theory and techniques, Asrar U. H. Sheikh, Springer, 2004.

4. Wireless Communication and Networking, Vijay Garg, Elsevier Publications,2007.

5. Wireless Communication – Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2005.

Page 166:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 163

5.7 COURSE PLAN:

Lecture No.

Course Learning Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference Bloom Level

L1-2

Discuss limitations of

telephone systems and basic

cellular system

Limitations of conventional

mobile telephone systems

Basic Cellular Mobile

System, First, Second, third

and fourth generation cellular

wireless systems

T1,R1

1&2

L3-5

List out factors effecting

fading

Uniqueness of mobile radio

environment- Long term

fading, Factors influencing

short term fading

T1,R1

2&3

L6

Classify multipath fading

Parameters of mobile

multipath fading- Time

dispersion parameters,

Coherence bandwidth,

T1,R1

1&3

L7 Compare types of small

scale fading

Doppler spread and coherence

time, Types of small scale

fading.

T1,R1 2&4

L9 Describe frequency reuse

concept

Concept of frequency reuse,

Co- channel Interference T1,R1 4&6

L10 Discuss cci Co-channel Interference

Reduction Factor T1,R1 1&4

L11

Obtain C/I from normal case

Desired C/I from a normal

case in an Omni directional

antenna system, System

capacity

T1,R1

2&5

L12 What is trunking and GOS Trunking and grade of service T1,R1 3&5

L13-

14

Explain about capacity in

cellular system

Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems- Cell splitting, Sectoring, Microcell zone concept

T1,R1 5&6

L16 Derive realtime CCI Measurement of real time

Co- Channel interference T1,R1 1&2

L17-

18

Design antenna system Design of Antenna system,

Antenna parameters and their

effect

T1,R1 2&3

Page 167:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 164

L19-

20

Illustrate diversity techniques

Diversity techniques- Space

diversity Polarization

diversity, Frequency diversity,

Time diversity

T1,R1

4&5

L22 Define ACI Adjacent channel interference T1,R1 1&2

L23 Explain near end far end

interference Near end- far end interference T1,R1 2&3

L24-27

Explain cross talk

Cross talk, Effects on coverage

and interference by power

decrease, Antenna height

decrease, Effects of cell site

components, UHF TV

interference

T1,R1

3&4

L29-31

Discuss signal reflection in flat

and hilly terrain

Signal reflections in flat and

hilly terrain, Effect of human

made structures, Phase

difference between direct and

reflected paths

T1,R1

1&2

L32-34 Why constant standard deviation Constant standard deviation, T1,R1 2&3

Straight line path loss slope

L35

Discuss near and long

distance propagation

General formula for mobile

propagation over water and flat

open area, Near and long

distance propagation

T1,R1

3&4

L37-39

Explain lee model

Path loss from a point to point

prediction model in different

conditions, merits of Lee model

T1,R1

4&5

L41 What are sum and difference

patterns

Sum and difference patterns and

their synthesis T1,R1 5&6

L42-43

Explain omni directional

antennas

Coverage-Omni directional

antennas, Interference reduction-

directional antennas for

interference reduction

T1,R1

1&2

L44-46

Compare space and umbrella

pattern antennas

Space diversity antennas,

Umbrella pattern antennas,

Minimum separation of cell site

antennas, mobile antennas

T1,R1

2&3

Page 168:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 165

5.8 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE OF THE

ACHIEVEMENT PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

H = Highly Relat

L48-52

Explain about spectrum

utilization

Numbering and grouping, Setup

access and paging channels,

Channel assignments to cell sites

and mobile units, Channel

sharing and borrowing,

Sectorization, Overlaid cells,

Non fixed channel assignment

T1,R1

3&4

L54-57

Discuss handoff

Handoff initiation, Types of

handoff, Delaying handoff,

Advantages of handoff, Forced

handoff, Mobile assisted and soft

handoff

T1,R1

4&5

L58-60 Describe dropped call rates Introduction to dropped call rates

and their evaluation T1,R1 5&6

Course

Objectives

Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

I

S S

S S H

II

S

S H S

III H

IV H

S

V

S

S H

VI

VII

S S

VIII

S S

S

IX

Page 169:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 166

5.9 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Programme Outcomes

Outcomes a b c d e f g h i j k l m

1 S S S

2 S S S

3

4 S H S

5 S S H H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

5.10 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. A mobile unit is compare of transceiver and a) Control unit b) Antenna system c) key pad d) timers

2. MTSO is

a) Mobile Transmitting Office b) Mobile transmitting switching office c) Mobile terminal switching office d) Mobile telephone switching office.

3. Central Co-coordinating function and administration is carried out by

a) cell site b) BSC c) MTSO d) PSTN & BSC

4. The quality of voice received can be estimated & judged by a) No. of dropped calls b) subjective tests c) Coverage capacity d) Transmitting power

5. In mobile radio environment the receives carrier power is proportional to ------- a 40

dB loss at receiver is observed& the mobile is moving up to 10 km

a) Ct-5

b b) R

-4 c) R

-40 d) C

-4

6. Average the below statements is operation of cellular systems a) Mobile originated cell b) Handoff procedure c) N/W originated cell d) Mobile unit initialization

7. Handoff used by --------& later renamed as ----------

a) USDC, channel assignment b)AMPS, handover c) IS-95, handover d) USDC, cell sectoring

Page 170:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 167

8. To have more coverage cell shape should be

a) Hexagon b) Circular c) Square d) Hexagon & Square

9. Example of analog cellular systems outside USA are

a) Japan (NTT),Nordic system (NMT) b) AMPS, Japan (NIT)

c) Arora, AMPS d) Japan (NTT) ,Nortic system (NMT),AMPS

10. Some of the digital cellular systems are

a) CDMA,AMPS b) push to table FM,AMPS

c) NA-TDMA,AMPS d) NA,TDMA,GSM

11. In United states under classification of areas based on propagation the top 61 to 90 markets is

a) very large cities b) small sized cities

c) below medium sized cities d) medium sized cities

12. In Ansthia a NMT network in cellular communication is known as

a) NMTN b) auto telefonnetz c) NMTW d) auto elecfonnetz

13. The Kuwait cellular system makes use of

a) USDC b) NMT’S switches c) NEC’S switches d) AMPS

14. Arrange the following statements un descending order of operation a) Handoff procedure b) mobile originated call c) Call termination d) N/W originated call

15. In Spain the cellular network used was

a) NMT 250 KHz b) NMT 450 KHz c) GSM & AMPS d) IS 54

16. The ability of base station to pick up the connect signal as mobile enters from cell 1 to cell 2 is

a) call splitting b) call sectoring c) sort handoff d) the coverage capacity

17. The small geographical area is cellular communication is defined as a) N=7 reuse pattern b)N=4 reuse pattern c) cluster d) cell

18. The items required for service quality are a) coverage b) GOS c) No. of dropped calls d) Voice quality

19. Mobile unit is connected to PSTN through

a) BTS alone b) MSC alone c) Handoff procedure d) BTS & MSC

20. AMPS standard uses

a) FM,FDD b) FM,AM c) AM,TDD d) FSK,MSK

21.The following are the elements of cellular mobile radio system a) Rxx&Txx b) Mobile unit & control unit c) C/I reduction factor & cell splitting d) Handdoff&Rxx

22. The concept of repeting same frequency is known as and the calls using same frequencies

is known as

Page 171:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 168

a) call splitting, adjacent calls b) freqsence,adjacent channels

c) freqsence ,co channels d) cell sectoring, cells

23.If D is the dist. Between two co-channel cell & R be is the cell rading then D/R is known as a) adjacent channel interference reduction factor b) co-channel interference reduction factor c) adjacent co-channel interference reduction factor d) none of the above

24.If N is the pattern & R is the rading of cell then frequency sense distance (D) is given as a) D=3NR b)D=3N

2 √R c) D=3NR

2d)D=(√3N) R

25. For N=4 & N=19 rsense cellular patterns the frequency sense distances are--- -----

and ----- a) 3.46 R & 4.6 R b) 3.46 R & BR c)6 R & 7.55 R d)3.46 R & 7.55 R

26. In a N cell sense pattern the equation of N is a) N=(i+j)

2 b) N=i

2+ij+j

2 c) N=i+j+2j d) N=j+2i

27. For N=7 sense pattern , the co-channel interference reduction

factor q is a) D/R =5.6 b) D/R =7.6 c)D/R =6 d) D/R

=4.6

28. When the mobile moves from original cell to a new cell and the call in progress has to be

continued smoothly , it is known as

a) cell sectoring b) hand-off technique c) desectinization d) coverage

29.The cell splitting is done as per traffic demand available in the cell is known as a) permanent cell splitting b) dynamic cell splitting c) semi-permanent splitting d) static cell splitting

30. In general after cell splitting technique new cell radices a) (old cell radius)

2 b) (old cell radins)

2 c) old cell radine/Π d) old cell radine/2

31. MTSO does the following functions a) performs all internal switching of the calls b) does not perform internal switching c) autonomously locates mobile d) manage data communication

32. In cellular system antennas front-to-back ratio of directional antennas is ------in the space

and ----in cell site a) 30dB,12dB b) 20dB,10dB c) 10dB,15dB d) 40dB,30dB

33. Interference in neighboring cells is reduced by

a) antenna tilting b) gain adjustment c) impedance d) antenna height

34. The capacity of switching system in cellular system in based on the following

a) No. of switch ports b) battery conditions c) reducing switch ports d) processor capacity

35. Service life of switching equipment is not determined by a) how long it takes to attain its full capacity b) temperature c) life cycle of equipment d) none

36. to increase capacity of equipment in case of designing switching equipment as modules is a) modules destination b) modules can be reduced c) more modules can be added d) modules need not be

Page 172:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 169

altered 38. Data link -----------

a) cannot carry multiple channel data b) can carry multiple channel data

c) is not effected by cellular system d) is effected by cellular system

39. The macro and micro cells are available in a) hand-off b) cell sectorization c) co-channel cellular region d) umbrella pattern

40. Consider there are 5 cell sites C1 to C5.A uses enters from 1 cell site to another cell with

4 min. If all the cells are of equal distance at 12 min from stating point in which cell the

uses will be?

a) In C4 b) A boundary of C3 c) In C5 d) In C2

Key-

1) b 2) d 3) c 4) b 5) b 6) b 7) b 8) a 9) a 10) d 11)d 12) b 13) c 14) d 15) b 16) c 17) d

18) a 19) d 20) a 21)c 22) b 23) c 24) b 25) d 26) d 27) b 28) d 29) b 30) b 31) d 32) a 33 b 34) a 35)

d 36) c 37) c 38) b 39) d 40) a

UNIT-II

1) In cellular system if cluster size N is greater than 7 it will result in

a) reduces no. of channels in a cell b) increases no. of channels in a cell

c). reduces no. of channels but it reduces spectrum efficiency d)none of the above

2) The goal of frequency sense technique in a cell is

to improve system gain b) to alter co-channel interference

factor c). to increase spectrum efficiencyd) to improve

synchronization

3) In acellular system if 7 cell sense pattern is applied the co-channel interference reduction factor q

will be

a) 5.61 b) 5.78 c) 4.9 d) 4.6

4) The value of co-channel interference ratio q is 5.2 for N=9 and if n=12 it

will be a)8 b) 16 c) 6 d) 12

5) an antenna used in wireless transmission radiates in all directions and it is a

a) spot beam antenna b) yagiuda antenna

c) omni directional antenna d) none of the above

Page 173:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 170

1) If cluster size N=4 a better cell sectoring system will

be a) 120o b) 90

o c) 60

o d) 20

o

2) The sectored cell needs more antenna to be mounted and frequent hand-offs

a) 120o b) 60

o c) 90

o d) 360

o

3) The narrow beam applications which cellular pattern given below is correct

b) N=7 with 120 0 sectors b) N=4 with 60

0 sectors

c)N=4 with 90 0 sectors d) N=7 with 90

0 sectors

4) In flat ground as in a vally interference can be effectively reduced by

c) lowering antenna height b) reducing power level

c) increasing antenna height d) lowering antenna separation

5) If there is a noted available in antenna pattern it will have the following effect

a) will not alter interference b) reduce interference c) inc gain d) inc power

6) The co-channel & long distance interference are reduced by

a) yagi-uda antenna b) umbrella pattern

c) uni directional antenna d) none of the above

7) Technique is used for reducing interference is

a) cell splitting b) hand-off c) diversity d) sectoring

8) Speech quality can be measured by

a) subjective b) SNR c) C/I d) SNR & C/I

9) SINAD is

a) signal to noise and distortion ratio b)signal to noise and deviation factor

c) signal to noise ratio d) none of the above

Page 174:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 171

10) The [signal+ noise+ distortion/noise+ distortion]

a) SIAD factor b) SINAD c) SINAD reduction factor d) co-channel interference reduction

factor

11) Adjacent channel & next channel interference are

a) different b) same c) related by amplitude d) having more interference

12) If two service providers are available in one market it is known as

a) honopoly b) duality c) dnopoly d) duplex

13) Ring combines can handle

a) 16 channels b) 8 channels c) 32 channels d)8 channels

14) In cellular system is close talk accurs it will be ----as compared to telephone systems

a) less b) more c) doubled d) unpredictable

15) SAT is

a) supervisory amplifies tuner b) supervisory amplitude tone

c) supervisory audio tone d) supervisory analog tone

16) cell coverage is based on --- on the ----------

a) gain, power b) signal amplification

c) signal coverage d) human made structures, national terrains

17) Tohiage areas are

d) national terrains b) human made structures c) open areas d) urban areas

18) At the mobile & base station antenna heights will be -----and--------

a) 30m,3m b) 3m,30m c) 40m,0.4m d)30m,60m

19) Tohiage , loses is due to the fall

e) fall building b) indoor structures c) fall trees,leavesetc d) out door structures

20) The high cell site covers signal in

a) small area b) larger area

c) short distance propagation d) long distance propagation

21) The gradual bending of rays due to the changing effective dielectric constant of atmosphere is the

foll effect

A.troposphere reflection b) troposphere infraction c) ------ d) diffraction

Page 175:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 172

27)Troposphere wave propagation can be interferences and it can be controlled by, the following

a) Umbrella antenna beam pattern b) Directional antenna pattern

c) Both a & B d) Yagi –uda antenna

28) Foliage losses is due to the following

a) Tall Buildings b) Indoor Structures

c) Tall trees, leave etc d) out door structures

29) The high cell site covers signal in

a) small area b) larger area

c) short distance propagation d) long distance propagation

30) The Gradual bending of rays due to changing effective di-electric constant of atmosphere is the

fall effect.

a) Troposphere reflection b)Troposphere reflection C)Moistness d) diffraction

31) Refraction index decreases with height , and the rays will be curved downward and bottom as fall

condition

a) dual propagation b) reflection c) diffraction d) refraction

32) Troposphere wave propagation cause interferences and it can be controlled by the following

a) umbrella antenna beam pattern b) directional antenna pattern

c) a and b d) yagiuda antenna

32. The path unobstincted by terrain profile and man made structure is given below

b) non-obstictive path b) indirect path c) line of sight path d) none of the above

Page 176:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 173

33) Consider following statements & mention whether it is true or false

1) In manmade structures , there is spare structures

2) In manmade structures , there is spare dense manmade structures

a) 1 is true b) 2 is true c) 1& 2 true d) 1 both are false

35) The range for which pt-to-pt model is very useful to provide predictions is

a) 10 mi or less b) 100 mi or less c) more than 50 mi d) b/w 50-100 mi

36) In mobile –to mobile propagation the propagation channel acts as following component

a) repeater b) alternator c) filter d) amplifier

37) Find whether true or false

1) In foliage areas the trees such as oale lose their leaves in winter

2) In summer foliage losses are heavy

a) 1 & 2 are true b) 2 is true c) 1 is false d) both are false

38)The parameters of foliage losses are

1) leaves 2) trundles 3) branches 4) density of distribution of

trees a) 1,2 & 3 b)2,3 & 4 c) 1,2,3,4 d) 1& 2

39) In double link edge diffract n model the total diffraction loss is as the foll

a) square of the sum of the two diffraction losses b) difference of the two diffraction losses

c) sum of the two diffraction losses d) none of the above

40) The area-to-area prediction model provides accuracy with 8db σ which is the –of actual

path loss data

a) 58% b) 88% c) 68% d) 87%

KEY:

1) c 2) c 3) d 4) c 5) c 6) c 7) b 8) b 9) a 10) b 11) c 12) c 13) a 14) a 15) b

16) b 17) c 18) c 19) c 20) c 21)c 22)d 23)c 24)c 25)c 26)c 27)c 28)c 29)ab 30) b 31)b

32)b 33)c 34)c 35) d 36) b 37) b 38)a 39) b 40) a

Page 177:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 174

UNIT-III

1) The term EIRP refers to

a) Effective isotropic radiated power b) Effective radiated power

c) Effective isolated radiated power d) Effective isotropic related power

2) EIRP is related to ERP by the relation

a) ERP=EIRP-4dB b) ERP=(EIRP)2-2dB c) ERP=EIRP-6dB d) ERP=EIRP-2dB

3) In a start up system an omni cell transmitting antennas are

a) directional b) omni directional c) yagiuda pattern d) none of the above

4) In abnormal antenna configuration an omnicell site is equipped with 90 channels for

which ---- transmitting antennas are used

a) 16 b) 9 c) 6 d) 3

5) In abnormal antenna configuration an omnicell site is equipped with 45 channels for

which ---- transmitting antennas are used

a)13 b) 5 c) 3 d) 5

6) Which device can be used to reduce the no. of transmitting antennas in mobile communication

a) multiplexers b) hybrid ring combines c) attenuators d) local antenns

7) One transmitting antenna for two receiving antennas is applied in directional antenna

arrangement what will be type of cell sectoring

a) 60o sector b) 120

o sector c)30

o sector d) 90

o sector

8) Under space diversity antennas is h is the height of antenna,d is separation distance then

efficiency ή is

a) ή=h2 /d b) ή=h/d c) ή=h/d

2 d) ή=( h/d)

2

9) Several vertically stacked umbrella pattern antenna can form a

a) abnormal atenna b) high gain antenna

c) interference reduction antenna d) mobile antenna

Page 178:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 175

10) Min separation of cell site receiving antennas will have the following advantage

a) inter modulation can be avoided b) reduces ISI

c) reduces noise d) controls distortion

11) The motor vehicle mounted antenna is the following antenna

a) directional antenna b) omni directional antenna

c) smart antenna d) micro strip antenna

12) What will be the radiation pattern of roof mounted antenna

a) uniformly distributed b) non uniformly distributed

c) a &b d) cannot be predicted

13) IS it necessary to drill a hole in glass mounted antenna for coupling

a) yes b) no c) cannot be drilled d) b & c

14) What is the difference in position between glass mounted and roof mounted antenna

a) 6dB b) 7 dB c) 0 dB d) 3 dB

15) The gain of glass mounted antenna will be

a) 1 to 10 dB b) 1 to 3 dB c) 5 dB d) 7 dB

16) The two branch space diversity antennas can in mobile communication

a) Reduce fading b) increase fading c) reduce gain d) increase gain

17) What is the advantage of shaded glass if it is used for glass mounted antenna

a) has no metal content b ) umbrella and has less metal content

c) has less metal content d) has high metal content

Page 179:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 176

18) Comment an antenna beam pattern of directional antenna

a) suppressed horizontally b)suppressed vertically

c) elevated vertically d) elevated horizontally

19) Comment on antenna beam pattern of high gain antenna

a) elevated vertically b) suppressed horizontally

c) elevated horizontally d) suppressed vertically

20)b What is the advantage of shaded glass if it is used for glass mounted antenna

a) has no metal content b) umbrella and has less metal content

c) has less metal content d) has high metal content

21) The main function of frequency management is given below

a) increasing gain b) increasing power

c) dividing total number of channels in to subsets d) adding the given no. of channels

22) Numbering the channel is done by the fort channel

a) RVC b) RCC c) FVC d) FCC

23) What basis in affixed channel set that consists of one or more subsets is assigned to a cell site

a) short term basis b) in dynamic basis c) long term basis d) temporary basis

24) What is the method of channel assignment to a mobile unit during call in progress

a) long term basis b) permanent basis c) short term basis d) in flexible mode

25) Allocation of specific channels to a cell site is known as

a) frequency management b) freq. allotment

c) channel assignment d) channel modeling

26) What is the other name of set up channels?

a) reverse channels b) forward channels c) control channels d) traffic channels

Page 180:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 177

27) What are the types of set up channels?

a) access channels and forward channels b) paging channels & reverse channels

c) access and paging channels d) forward & reverse channels

28) In set up channels every two way channel contains a ---- bandwidth

a) 60 khz b) 30 khz c) 30 mhz d) 45 khz

29) In channel case – set up channels can be used for paging and accessing

a) T no b) 1 c) 3 d) N

30) The forward setup channel is sent at the –and the reverse setup channel is sent at the—

a) mobile unit b) cell site c) BTS,PSTN d) BTS, MSC

31) All the setup channels carries only

a) header information b) data information

c) address information d) handoff information

32) In a cell how many set up channels are generally present

a) 32 b) 21 c) 53 d) any number

33) The process channel can be designed by as a channel apart from set up channels in the cell site

a) BSC b) PSTN c) MTSO d) control room

34) For keeping the reverse set up channels open as for as possible what is adapted in a mobile unit

a) handoff scheme b) self generation scheme

c) self location scheme d) channel assignment

Page 181:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 178

35) For searching a mobile unit is cell site what is the MTSO has to do?

a) waiting for activated b) receiving act signal

c) sending page d) receiving page

36) What is the main function of FDCC in cell site?

a) sends control information b) page to mobile unit

c) receiving page d) controls page

37) What is RECC?

a) reverse electrical control channel b) reverse control

channel c)reverse enable control channel d) retry enable cell

control

38) The FDCC is also known as

a) power of a forward set up channel b) power of a reverse channe

c) signal strength of reverse channel d) signal strength of set up channel

39) When there is no voice channel the cell site could send a message using set up channels

a) page b) direct cell retry c) acknowledge signal d) ready signal

40) Find whether the statements given below are correct

1) To increase freq. spectrum the no. of radio channels showed be increased

2) it can be done by narrow banding

a) both 1 & 2 are correct b) 1 is correct but 2 is nit the justification

c) both are not correct d) none of the above

KEY:

1c 2d 3c 4c 5c 6c 7c 8c 9ab 10 b 11b 12b 13c 14c 15 dc 16 b 17 b 18a 19 b

20 a 21c 22d 23c 24c 25c 26c 27c 28c 29b 30 b 31b 32b 33c 34c 35 d 36 b

37 b 38a 39 b 40 a

Page 182:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 179

UNIT-IV:

1) Set up channel will not be in the following case

a)before the call is established b) during the calling period

c) when call communication is over d) after the call establishment

2) Find whether true or false: Hand off required in situation such as

1) call site receiver weak signals from mobile at the cell boundary(-100 dB)

2) When mobile unit reaches the signal strength holes within the cell site

a)1 is true b) 2 is true c) both are false d) 1 & 2 are true

3) The received signals strength can be expression as

a) C+I b) C2 + I c) CI d) CI

2

4) The MTSO will handle the –first and--- second

a) originating calls, handoff calls b)handoff calls, originating calls

c) dropped calls , handoff calls d) dropped calls ,originating calls

5) If a hand off that should not occur but if it is forced to happen then it is called as below

a) soft hand-off b) hard hand-off c) forced hand-off d) none of the above

6. One of the method to make hand –off to occur in proper location and with less interference

is known as below

b) forced hand-off b) two hand off level c) hard hand-off d) soft hand-off

6) Hand-off controlling is done by

a) PSTN b) MTSO c) BSC d) cell site

7) Creative hand-off is required by

a) cell site b) MTSO c) BSC d) PSTN

8) The following of hand-off is --- compared to two threshold level hand-off

a) more effective b) less effective c) equal d) very negligible

Page 183:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 180

9) For the Q no. 12 prepare a hand-off would take place when Δ value is –

a) 1 dB< Δ < 3dB b) 1 dB< Δ < 2 dB c) 1 dB< Δ < 8dB d) 3 dB< Δ < 6dB

10) In normal hand-off procedure the hand-off request is based on the following

a) power level b) signal strength c) peak curren t d) non eof the above

11) If call hand-off is transferred from one system to another system is known as hand-off

a) inter system b ) intra system c) soft d) hard

12) The dropped call is –but -----it is terminated properly

a) after the call is established before b) after the call is established after

c) before the call is terminated, after d) call in progress, before

13) A good frequency management chart and frequency assignment will lead to-

a) reducing power b) reducing time period c) reducing hand-off d) reducing interference

14) The model used for selecting cell site location is given below

a) propagation protection b) path loss c) durleins d) knife edge

15) The purpose of tilting antenna patterns or using an umbrella pattern omni directional

antenna is given below

a) to confine time slots b) to confine energy in small area

c) to increase coverage area d) to decrease path area

16) Dynamic channel assignment is mainly done for the foll reason

a) increase traffic capacity b) decrease traffic capacity

c) increase gain level d) decrease transmit power

17) If BT/BC is total no. of voice channels ,C/I is carrier to interference ratio of system the relation

(m) among voice quantity ,dropped call rate an capacity is given as below

a) m= BT/BC/√2/3( C/I)s b) m= (BT/BC) (C/I)s

c) m=(BT/BC)2 (C/I)s d) m=√BT/BC/2/3(C/I)s

18) If δ is probability of signal being below specific threshold ( at receiver ) level μ is probability

of the signal below specific co-channel interference level then formula of dropped call site is given

below

a) (1+8) (1-μ) b)(1+8)2 (1-μ) c) (1+8) (1-μ)

2 d) (1-8) (1-μ)

Key:

1d 2d 3a 4b 5c 6b 7b 8b 9a 10 a 11a 12b 13a 14a 15 d 16 a 17 b 18a 19 a 20 d

Page 184:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 181

UNIT-V

1) Set up channel will not be in the following case

a)before the call is established b) during the calling period

c) when call communication is over d) after the call establishment

2) Find whether true or false: Hand off required in situation such as

3) call site receiver weak signals from mobile at the cell boundary(-100 dB)

4) When mobile unit reaches the signal strength holes within the cell site

b) 1 is true b) 2 is true c) both are false d) 1 & 2 are true

3) The received signals strength can be expression as

a) C+I b) C2 + I c) CI d) CI

2

4) The MTSO will handle the –first and--- second

a) originating calls, handoff calls b)handoff calls, originating calls

c) dropped calls , handoff calls d) dropped calls ,originating calls

5) If a hand off that should not occur but if it is forced to happen then it is called as below

a) soft hand-off b) hard hand-off c) forced hand-off d) none of the above

6) One of the method to make hand –off to occur in proper location and with less interference is known

as below

a) forced hand-off b) two hand off level c) hard hand-off d) soft hand-off

7) Hand-off controlling is done by

a) PSTN b) MTSO c) BSC d) cell site

8) Creative hand-off is required by

a) cell site b) MTSO c) BSC d) PSTN

9) The following of hand-off is --- compared to two threshold level hand-off

a) more effective b) less effective c) equal d) very negligible

10) If a power difference between received signal at cell site when a request for hand-off and no hand-

off cases

a) Δ > 3dB and -Δ > 3dB b)Δ > -3dB and Δ > 3dB c) Δ > 6 dB d) Δ < 6dB

11) For the Q no. 12 prepare a hand-off would take place when Δ value is –

a) 1 dB< Δ < 3dB b) 1 dB< Δ < 2 dB c) 1 dB< Δ < 8dB d) 3 dB< Δ < 6dB

Page 185:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 182

12) In normal hand-off procedure the hand-off request is based on the following

a) power level b) signal strength c) peak curren t d) non eof the above

13) If call hand-off is transferred from one system to another system is known as hand-off

a) inter system b ) intra system c) soft d) hard

14) The dropped call is –but -----it is terminated properly

a) after the call is established before b) after the call is established after

c) before the call is terminated, after d) call in progress, before

15) A good frequency management chart and frequency assignment will lead to-

a) reducing power b) reducing time period c) reducing hand-off d) reducing interference

16) The model used for selecting cell site location is given below

a) propagation protection b) path loss c) durleins d) knife edge

17) The purpose of tilting antenna patterns or using an umbrella pattern omni

directional antenna is given below

a) to confine time slots b) to confine energy in small area

c) to increase coverage area d) to decrease path area

18) Dynamic channel assignment is mainly done for the foll reason

a) increase traffic capacity b) decrease traffic capacity

c) increase gain level d) decrease transmit power

19) If BT/BC is total no. of voice channels ,C/I is carrier to interference ratio of system the relation

(m) among voice quantity ,dropped call rate an capacity is given as below

a) m= BT/BC/√2/3( C/I)s b) m= (BT/BC) (C/I)s

c) m=(BT/BC)2 (C/I)s d) m=√BT/BC/2/3(C/I)s

20) If δ is probability of signal being below specific threshold ( at receiver ) level μ is

probability of the signal below specific co-channel interference level then formula of dropped

call site is given below

a) (1+8) (1-μ) b)(1+8)2 (1-μ) c) (1+8) (1-μ)

2 d) (1-8) (1-μ)

KEY:

1d 2d 3a 4b 5c 6b 7b 8b 9a 10 a 11a 12b 13a 14a 15 d 16 a 17 b 18a 19 a 20 d

Page 186:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 183

5.11 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

OBJECTIVES:

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality

needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is

the principal means of quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of

accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited.

In line with this, we have taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of outcome based

education in the process of problem solving and career development. So, all students of the

institute should understand the depth and approach of course to be taught through this

question bank, which will enhance learner’s learning process.

UNIT-I

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial – I

1 Discuss the Limitations of conventional mobile telephone systems Level 2 E

2 Explain the basic cellular system Level 2 I

3 Define Fading Level 1 H

4 Classify Types of small scale fading Level 3 N

5 Distinguish Time dispersion and freq selective parameters Level 4 E

6 Define frequency reuse Level 1 I

7 Explain the Concept of frequency reuse Level 2 E

8 Demonstrate Co-channel Interference Reduction Factor Level 2 N

9 Classify Cell splitting, Sectoring, Microcell zone concept Level 3 E

10 Distinguish Cell splitting, Sectoring Level 4 I

UNIT-II

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial – II

1 Define Interference Level 1 E

2 Discuss the Measurement of real time Co-Channel interference Level 2 B

3 Design of Antenna system Level 6 H

4 Classify Diversity techniques Level 2 K

5 Distinguish Space and time diversity Level 4 E

Page 187:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 184

6 Define Interference Level 1 E

7 Explain Non Co channel interference Level 2 K

8 Discuss the Adjacent channel interference Level 2 E

9 What is Near end- far end interference Level 1 A

10 Distinguish Co channel and non co channel interference Level 4 E

UNIT-III

S. No

Question Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial – III

1 How point to point prediction model is obtained Level 1 A

2 Explain Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain Level 2 C

3 Why there is Constant standard deviation Level 1 K

4 Define Cross talk Level 1 C

5 Point of merits of Lee model Level 4 A

6 How Coverage-Omni directional antennas Level 1 B

7 Explain Interference reduction- directional antennas for interference

reduction Level 2 E

8 Discuss Umbrella pattern antennas Level 2 B

9 Find Minimum separation of cell site antennas Level 1 E

10 Distinguish Sum and difference patterns and their synthesis Level 4 B

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcom

e

Tutorial – IV

1 What are sectorization and over laid cells Level 1 K

2 Explain Access channel, Paging channel Level 2 K

3 Relate channel sharing and borrowing Level 2 H

4 Explain about numbering and grouping of channels Level 2 K

5 Distinguish between Fixed channel and Non Fixed Channel Assignments Level 4 K

Page 188:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 185

UNIT-V

S. No

Question Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Tutorial – V

1 Explain intersystem handoff Level 5 A

2 Conclude Mobile Assisted handoff, Delaying handoff Level 5 A

3 Determine the number of handoffs per call Level 4 A

4 Discuss about handoff Level 6 A

5 Classify different types of handoffs Level 4 A

5.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

S.

No

Question Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment – I

1 Explain about the general description of the system Level 2 E

2 Discuss about planning of cellular system in detail Level 2 I

3 Define Fading Level 1 H

4 Classify Types of small scale fading Level 3 N

5 Illustrate Doppler spread and coherence time Level 3 E

6 Solve the maximum no of calls per hour per call Level 1 I

7 With the help of neat diagram explain the N cell reuse pattern for four,

seven cell reuse Level 2 E

8 Explain the co-channel interference reduction factor and derive the

general formula for C/L Level 2 N

9 Discuss frequency reuse distance Level 2 E

10 Illustrate Microcell zone concept Level 3 I

UNIT-II

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment – II

1 Define co-channel interference? Level 1 E

2 Explain co –channel interference which effects at a cell site. Level 2 B

3 Explain how co-channel interference is measured in real time mobile

radio transceivers? Level 2 H

4 Compare co-channel interference performance of a directional antenna Level 2 K

5 Relate Antenna parameters and their effects Level 2 E

Page 189:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 186

6 From the signal coverage point of view explain ground incident angle,

elevation angle, ground reflection and reflection point. Level 2 E

7 What is point to point predication model? Level 2 K

8 Explain the effects of due to human made structures. Level 2 E

9 Why there is constant standard deviation along a path loss curve? Level 1 A

10 Define Cross talk Level 1 E

UNIT-III

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment – III

1 What do you understand by engineering antenna pattern? Explain the

corresponding Level 1 A

2 Explain the Path loss from a point to point prediction model in

different conditions, merits of Lee model. Level 2 C

3 Explain the antenna arrangement of spare diversity used at cell site. Level 2 K

4 Illustrate Phase difference between direct and reflected paths Level 2 C

5 Interpret merits of Lee model Level 2 A

6 Discus the concept of Minimum separation of cell site antennas Level 6 B

7 Write about Space diversity antennas Level 2 E

8 Explain Sum and difference patterns and their synthesis. Level 2 B

9 What are the different techniques to utilize the frequency spectrum,

explain with brief Level 1 E

10 Define Omni directional antennas Level 1 B

UNIT-IV

S. No

Question

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment – IV

1 Explain the grouping of the voice, setup and paging channels. Level 2 K

2 Explain the channel assignment to the cell sites based on the adjacent

channels. Level 2 K

3 Relate channel sharing and borrowing Level 2 H

4 Develop a procedure to allot the channels for the travelling mobile

units Level 3 K

5 Demonstrate Non fixed channel assignment Level 1 K

Page 190:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 187

UNIT-V

S. No Question

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

Assignment – V

1 What is handoff? Level 1 A

2 Explain different types of handoff. Level 2 A

3 Relate Mobile Assisted handoff, Delaying handoff Level 2 A

4 Why hand off is necessary for cellular systems? Determine the two types of handoffs

Level 1 A

5 What is meant by hard handoff? Level 1 A

Blooms Taxonomy Level

Discuss Level 6

Explain Level 2

Define Level 1

Demonstrate Level 2

Develop Level 6

Discuss Level 6

What Level 1

Why Level 1

Relate Level 1

Interpret Level 2

Illustrate Level 2

Compare Level 4

Solve Level 6

Classify Level 2

Distinguish Level 4

How Level 1

Page 191:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 188

PROGRAMME: B.Tech ECE

AC:YEAR: 2018-2019

DEGREE: B.TECH IV YEAR

COURSE: EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

DESIGN

SEMESTER: I CREDITS: 4

COURSE COORDINATOR: Mr.K.Sandeep

Kumar

COURSE CODE: A70440

REGULATION:R15

COURSE TYPE: ELECTIVE-II

COURSE AREA/DOMAIN: ECE CONTACT HOURS: 4 hours/Week.

CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE

: NILL

LAB COURSE NAME: NILL

6.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

This course on Embedded systems will first the students to the fundamental requirements of embedded

systems and the interaction between hardware and software in such systems. Next the course will

discuss some basic steps of hardware design, introduce to ASIPs, ASICs and FPGAs. Since many of the

embedded systems will have real time constraints, basic issues of real time operating systems will be

discussed. This will be followed by formal specification models and languages, mapping the specification

to hardware and software Components along with decisions on design tradeoffs and hardware software

partitioning.

6.2 PRE-REQUISITES:

C.CODE COURSE NAME DESCRIPTION SEM

1 Switching Theory and Logical

Design

Good Logic thinking skills, Concepts of

Number Systems, RAM, ROM II-I

2

COMPUTER

ORGANIZATION &

OPERATING SYSTEMS

Knowledge of communicating with I/O

devices and Operating system III-I

3 Micro Processors & Micro

Controllers Knowledge of Processors and Controllers III-II

6.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Session Marks University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Mid Semester Test

There shall be two midterm examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and

objective type tests.

The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration.

75 100

Page 192:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 189

Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has

to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks.

The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes

duration. It consists of 10 multiple choice and 10 objective

type questions, the student has to answer all the questions

and each carries half mark.

First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first

two and half units of syllabus and second midterm

examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments.

There shall be two assignments in every theory course.

Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two

assignments in each course.

6.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 80minutes 20

2 I Assignment - 5

3 II Mid Examination 80minutes 20

4 II Assignment - 5

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

6.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES & OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level

Understand the basics of an embedded

system.

Understand and Design Embedded

Systems

BL1,2

Understand concepts of programming

embedded systems

Understand the internal architecture and

operation of advanced microcontrollers

BL 1,2,4

To learn the method of designing an

Embedded system for any type of

applications.

Understand types of Memory and

Interfacing to External world.

BL 1,2,3

To understand Operating Systems

Concepts, types and choosing RTOS

Learn basics of OS and RTOS BL 1,2,5

Design, implement and Test Embedded

system.

Understand Embedded firmware design

approaches

BL 3,5,6

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

Page 193:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 190

6.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

Blooms

Level

A An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science

and engineering S

Solving

Gate and

Text book

Problems

APPLY

B An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as

to analyze and interpret data S

Solving

Gate and

Text book

Problems

APPLY

C

An ability to design a system, component, or process to

meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as

economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health

and safety, manufacturability and sustainability.

H

Assignment

and

Gate

questions

Apply and

Analyze

D An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering

problems. S

Class Test

& Group

Activity

Apply

E An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern

engineering tools necessary for engineering practice. S

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

F

An ability to understand the special duty they owe to

protect the public’s health, safety and welfare by virtue of

their professional status as engineers in society.

N -- --

G

An ability to understand and correctly interpret the impact

of engineering solutions in global, societal and

environmental contexts and demonstrate the knowledge of

a need for sustainable development.

H

Mini /

Micro

Projects

and GATE

questions

Analyze

and Justify

H An understanding of professional and ethical

responsibility. N -- --

I

An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as

a member or leader in diverse teams, and in

multidisciplinary settings.

S Class Test

& Seminar Analyze

J

An ability to communicate effectively on complex

engineering activities with the engineering community

and with society at large, such as, being able to

comprehend and write effective reports and design

documentation, make effective presentations, give and

receive clear instructions.

S Seminars Understand

& Analyze

K

An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding

of the engineering finance and management principles as

a member and leader in a team to manage projects in

multi-disciplinary environments.

S

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

L Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

life-long analyzing. S

Group

Activity Analyze

Page 194:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 191

M

An ability to design and implement projects in the areas

including Signal Processing, Microwaves,

Communication Systems, IC Technology and Embedded

Systems.

H

Mini and

Micro

Projects

Apply

N

An ability to use knowledge in various domains to

identify research gaps and hence to provide solution to

new ideas and innovations.

S Seminars &

Projects

Analyze &

Apply

N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

6.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I:

Introduction to Embedded Systems: Definition of Embedded system, Embedded systems vs General

Computing Systems, History of Embedded systems, Classification, Major Application Areas, Purpose of

Embedded systems, Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded systems.

UNIT-II

Typical Embedded System: Core of Embedded system: General Purpose and Domain Specific Processors,

ASICs, PLDs, Commercial Off-The-Shelf components (COTS), Memory: ROM, RAM, Memory according

to the type of Interface, Memory Shadowing, Memory Selection for Embedded systems, Sensors and

Actuators, Communication Interface: Onboard and External Communication Interfaces.

UNIT-III

Embedded Firmware: Reset Circuit, Brown-out Protection Circuit, Oscillator Unit, Real Time Clock,

Watchdog Timer, Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development Languages

UNIT-IV

RTOS Based Embedded System Design: Operating System Basics, Types of Operating Systems, Tasks,

Process and Threads, Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Task Scheduling

UNIT-V:

Task Communication: Shared Memory, Message Passing, Remote Procedure Call and Sockets,

Task Synchronization: Task Communications/ Synchronization Issues, Tasks Synchronization Techniques,

Device Drivers, How to Choose an RTOS

Page 195:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 192

TEXT BOOK:

3. Introduction to Embedded Systems – Shibu K.V, Mc Graw Hill

REFERENCE BOOKS:

8. Embedded Systems – Raj Kamal, TMH.

9. Embedded Systems Design – Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, John Wiley.

10. Embedded Systems – Lyla, Pearson 2013.

11. An Embedded Software Primer – David E. Simon, Pearson Education.

6.8 COURSE PLAN:

Lectur

e

Numbe

r

Unit Topics to be Covered Reference

1-2 I Introduction to Embedded Systems: Definition of

Embedded system A1,A3

3 I Embedded systems vs General Computing Systems A1,A3

4-5 I History of Embedded systems A1,A3

6-7 I Classification A1,A3

8 I Major Application Areas A1,A3

9 I Purpose of Embedded systems A1,A3

10-11 I Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded systems A1,A3

12 I Revision A1,A3

13 II Typical Embedded System: Core of Embedded system A1,A3

14 II General Purpose and Domain Specific Processors A1,A3

15-17 II ASICs A1,A3

18-19 II PLDs A1,A3

20 II Commercial Off-The-Shelf components (COTS) A1,A3

21 II Memory: ROM A1,A3

22 II Memory: RAM A1,A3

23 II Memory according to the type of Interface A1,A3

24 II Memory Shadowing A1,A3

25 II Memory Selection for Embedded systems A1,A3

26 II Sensors and Actuators A1,A3

27 II Communication Interface A1,A3

28 II Onboard Communication Interfaces A1,A3

29 II External Communication Interfaces A1,A3

30 II Revision A1,A3

31 III Embedded Firmware A1,A3

32-33 III Reset Circuit A1,A3

34-35 III Brown-out Protection Circuit A1,A3

36-37 III Oscillator Unit A1,A3

Page 196:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 193

38-39 III Real Time Clock A1,A3

40-41 III Watchdog Timer A1,A3

42-45 III Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development

Languages A1,A3

46 III Revision A1,A3

47 IV RTOS Based Embedded System Design A2

48 IV Operating System Basics A2

49 IV Types of Operating Systems A2

50 IV Tasks A2

51-52 IV Process and Threads A2

53-54 IV Multiprocessing and Multimasking A2

55-56 IV Task Scheduling A2

57 IV Revision A2

58 V Task Communication: Shared Memory A2

59 V Message Passing A2

60 V Remote Procedure Call and Sockets A2

61-62 V Task Synchronization: Task Communications/

Synchronization Issues A2

63 V Tasks Synchronization Techniques A2

64 V Device Drivers A2

65-66 V How to Choose an RTOS A2

67 V Revision A2

6.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Course Outcomes

a b c d e

I S

II S S

III H

IV H S

V S

S= Supportive H= Highly Related

6.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n

a S

b S S S S S

c S S

d S S S H S

e S S S S S S

S= Supportive H= Highly Related

Page 197:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 194

6.11 QUESTION BANK:

Unit-I

INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

S.No Question Blooms Taxonomy Level

1. Define a System. With examples? Understand

2. Discuss an embedded system? Understand

3. Write the advantages of embedded system? Apply

4. Write the disadvantages of embedded system? Understand

5. Give the applications of an embedded system? Understand

6. Describe various classifications of embedded systems? Remember

7. Give two essential units of a processor on an embedded system? Apply

8. Analyze the execution unit of a processor in an embedded

system do? Apply

9. Give the classification of embedded system? Apply

10. Discuss the various embedded system requirements? Understand

11. Give examples for small scale embedded systems? Apply

12. Give examples for medium scale embedded systems? Apply

13. Give examples for large scale embedded systems? Apply

14. Define is the operational quality attribute? Understand

15. Define is the non-operational quality attribute? Understand

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1. What is an embedded system? Explain the different applications

of embedded systems? Remember

2. Explain the various purposes of embedded systems in detail with

illustrative examples? Understand

3. Explain the different classifications of embedded systems. Give Evaluate

Page 198:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 195

an example for each?

4. Explain the different characteristics of embedded systems in

detail? Understand

5. Explain quality attribute in the embedded system development

context? Remember

6. What are the different qualities attributes to be considered in an

embedded system design? Understand

7.

What is the operational quality attribute? Explain the important

operational quality attributes to be considered in any embedded

system design?

Understand

8.

What is the non-operational quality attribute? Explain the

important operational quality attributes to be considered in any

embedded system?

Understand

9. Explain the quality attribute Response in the embedded system

design context? Evaluate

10. Explain the quality attribute Throughput in the embedded

system design context? Evaluate

11. Explain the quality attribute Reliability in the embedded system

design context? Evaluate

12. Explain the quality attribute maintainability in the embedded

system design context? Evaluate

13. Explain the quality attribute information security in the

embedded system design context? Evaluate

14. Explain the quality attribute safety in the embedded system

design context? Evaluate

15. Explain the quality attribute portability in the embedded system

design context? Evaluate

GROUP - C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Give examples for general purpose processor? Remember

2 Describe embedded cores? Understand

3 Explain the real life example on the bonding of embedded

technology with human life? Analyze

4 Discuss about the product life cycle of an embedded product

development? Evaluate

UNIT-II

Page 199:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 196

TYPICAL EMBEDDED SYSTEM

Group – A (Short Answer Questions)

1 Describe the components used as the core of an embedded

system? Understand

2 Give the difference between microprocessor and

microcontroller? Understand

3 Define is digital signal processing (DSP)? Understand

4 Define is processor architecture? Understand

5 Define programmable logic device? Understand

6 Write the difference between RISC and CISC processors? Analyze

7 Write the difference between PLD and ASIC? Analyze

8 Write the difference between masked ROM and OTP? Analyze

9 Discuss the different types of RAM used for embedded system

design? Apply

10 Define SRAM cell? Understand

11 Define DRAM cell? Understand

12 Define Relay? What are the different types of relays are

available? Understand

13 Define is PPI device? Understand

14 Write is the difference between I2C and SPI communication

interface? Analyze

15 Write the merits and limitations of the RS232 interface? Evaluate

16 Write the merits and limitations of the IEEE1394 interface over

USB? Understand

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the components of typical embedded systems in detail? Evaluate

2 Which are the components used as the core of an embedded

systems? Explain the merits and drawbacks? Understand

3

What is the difference between microprocessor and

microcontroller? Explain the role of micro processors and micro

controllers in embedded systems?

Understand

4 What is digital signal processing (DSP)? Explain the role of Evaluate

Page 200:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 197

DSP in embedded system design?

5

What is processor architecture? What is the different processor

architectures available processor/controller design? Give an

example

Evaluate

6 What is programmable logic device? What are different types of

PLDs? Explain the role of PLDs in embedded system design? Understand

7 What are the different types of memories used in embedded

systems design? Explain the role of each? Analyze

8 What are the different types of memories used for program

storage in embedded systems design? Analyze

9 What are the advantages of FLASH over other program storage

memory in Embedded system design? Understand

10 What is sensor? Explain its role in embedded system design?

Illustrate with an example? Evaluate

11 What is actuator? Explain its role in embedded system design?

Illustrate with an example? Evaluate

12 Explain the different factor that needs to be considering in the

selection of memory for embedded system? Apply

13 What are differences between general purpose processor and

application specific instruction set processors with an example? Understand

14

Explain the on different onboard communication interface in

brief? Explain the on different external communication interface

in brief?

Apply

15 Explain the sequence of operation for communicating with an

I2C slave device? Apply

16 Explain the RS 232 serial interface in detail? Apply

GROUP - C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1

Draw the interfacing diagram for connecting an LED to the port

pin of a microcontroller. The LED is turned ON when the

microcontroller port pin is at Logic 0.

Apply

2 Explain the sequence of operation for communicating with 1

wire slave device. Evaluate

3 Write a C program to interface 7 segment LED display to

microcontroller 8051? Apply

4 Write a C program to interfacing matrix keyboard to Apply

Page 201:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 198

microcontroller 8051?

UNIT-III

Embedded Firmware

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define Assembly Level Language? Remember

2 Discuss about format of the assembly level language? Remember

3 What is absolute object file? Understand

4 Write the difference between compiler and cross compiler? Understand

5 Define inline assembly? Analyze

6 Give the limitations of the high level language based development? Analyze

7 Write short notes on Linker and Locater? Understand

8 Discuss about the object to hex file converter? Understand

9 Define embedded firmware? Understand

10 Define super loop model design in embedded firmware design? Understand

11 Discuss briefly about approachment of embedded operating system? Analyze

12 What is mean by mnemonics? Give the example? Understand

13 Distinguish between the assembly language and machine language? Analyze

14 What are the assembler directive instructions? Give example? Understand

15 What are the drawbacks of the assembly language based development? Analyze

16 What is the process to perform the translation of assembly to machine

code? Understand

17 Define the functionality of cross compiler conversion? Understand

18 What are the steps are require in firmware execution flow? Understand

19 Write the examples of RTOS employed in embedded product

development? Understand

20 Define Watch Dog Timer? Understand

21 Write brief notes on Library file creation and usage? Understand

Page 202:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 199

22 Define general purpose operating system? Give the example Understand

23 Define RTOS? Give the example? Understand

24 Distinguish between the general purpose operating system and real

time operating system? Analyze

25 Compare between the assembly level and high level languages based

development? Analyze

26 Compare between the mixing assembly with high level and mixing

high level languages with assembly? Analyze

GROUP - B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What is embedded firmware? What are the different approaches

available for embedded firmware development?. Understand

2 Explain the role of RESET circuit in embedded system Analyze

3 Explain the role of Real Time Clock in embedded system Analyze

4 Explain the role of Watch dog Timer in embedded system Evaluate

5 Explain the role of Brown out protection circuit in embedded system Evaluate

6 Explain the various steps involved in the assembling of an assembly

language program? Evaluate

7 Explain the advantages of Assembly level language based on

embedded firmware development? Evaluate

8 Explain the high level language based on embedded firmware

development technique? Apply

9 Explain about source file to object file translation in the assembly

language based development? Apply

10 Explain about library file creation and usage in the assembly language

based development? Evaluate

11 Write the advantages and drawbacks of assembly language based

development? Understand

12 Write the advantages and limitations of high language based

development? Understand

13 Explain about mixing assembly with high level language (assembly

language with C)? Apply

14 Explain about mixing high level language with assembly (C with Apply

Page 203:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 200

assembly language)?

GROUP – C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Give the examples for situations demanding mixing of C with

assembly? Explain the techniques for mixing of C with assembly? Apply

2 Give the examples for situations demanding mixing of assembly with

C? Explain the techniques for mixing assembly with C? Apply

UNIT-IV

RTOS Based Embedded System Design

GROUP - A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define is an operating system. Understand

2 Define kernel? Understand

3 Discuss about kernel space and user space? Understand

4 Define monolithic and micro kernel? Understand

5 Define task control block? Understand

6 Define virtual memory? Understand

7 Analyze how accurate time management is achieved in real time

kernel? Analyze

8 Define process life cycle? Understand

9 Define process control block? Understand

Analyze how threads and process are related? Analyze

10 Give the difference between threads and process in detail? Understand

11 Give the comparison between multitasking, multiprogramming, multi

processing? Analyze

12 Discuss all activates are involved in the context switching? Evaluate

13 Define task scheduling? Understand

14 Explain the different queues are associated with process scheduling? Evaluate

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 What is kernel? What are the different functions handled by a general

purpose kernel? Understand

Page 204:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 201

2 What is the difference between a general purpose kernel and real time

kernel? Give an example for both? Analyze

3 Explain the difference between memory management of general

purpose kernel and real time kernel? Understand

4 Explain how accurate time management is achieved in real time

kernel? Apply

5 Explain the TASK and Process in the operating system context? Apply

6 Explain the memory architecture of a process? Evaluate

7 Explain various activities involved in the creation of process and

threads? Evaluate

8 What is process control block (PCB)? Explain the structure of the PCB Understand

9 What is task control block (TCB)? Explain the structure of the TCB Understand

10 Explain how Threads and process are related? what are the common to

process and threads? Apply

11 Explain how multithreading can improve the performance of an

application with an illustrative example? Apply

12 Explain thread context switch and the various activities performed in

thread context switching for user level and kernel level threads Analyze

13 What all activities are involved in context switching? Understand

14 Explain the different multitasking models in the operating system

context? Analyze

15 Explain the various factors to be considered for the selection of

scheduling criteria? Apply

16 Explain the different types of non-preemptive scheduling algorithms?

State the merits and demerits of each? Understand

17 Explain the different types of preemptive scheduling algorithms? State

the merits and demerits of each? Understand

18 Explain Round Robin (RR) process scheduling with interrupts? Apply

19 Explain starvation in the process scheduling context? Explain how it

can be effectively tackled? Apply

20 What is IDLEPROCESS? What is the significance of it in the process

scheduling context? Apply

Page 205:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 202

GROUP - C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 What is the difference between Hard and Soft real time systems? Give

an example for Hard and Soft real time kernels? Analyze

2 Explain how Threads and process are related? What are the common to

process and threads? Evaluate

UNIT- V

Task Communication

GROUP – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Define deadlock? Understand

2 Discuss about Coffman conditions? Understand

3 Discuss about the different methods of handling deadlocks? Apply

4 Give the difference between buffer over run and buffer under run? Analyze

5 Define task synchronization? Understand

6 Give the difference between mutex and semaphores? Evaluate

7 Analyze the critical section problem? Analyze

8 Define device driver? Understand

9 Discuss about the sleep and wakeup mechanism for mutual exclusion Apply

10 What is Inter process communication? Understand

11 What is mean by test and set lock? Understand

12 Define semaphore? Understand

13 Define message passing? Understand

14 Define shared memory? Understand

15 What is mean by remote procedure call? Understand

GROUP – B (LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the various process interaction models in detail? Analyze

2 What is inter process communication (IPC)? Give an overview of

different IPC mechanisms adopted by various operating systems? Evaluate

Page 206:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 203

3 Explain The message passing technique for IPC. What are the merits

and demerits of message based IPC? Analyze

4 Explain the synchronous and asynchronous messaging mechanisms for

IPC under windows kernel? Apply

5 What is priority inversion? What are the different techniques adopted

for handling priority inversion? Understand

6 Explain the different task communication synchronization issues

encountered in inter process communication? Evaluate

7 What is mutual exclusion in the process synchronization context?

Explain the different mechanisms for mutual exclusion? Understand

8 Explain the interlocked functions for locked based mutual under

windows OS Analyze

9 What is semaphore? Explain the different types of semaphores. Where

it is used? Understand

10 Explain the semaphore based process synchronization under windows

OS Understand

11 What is critical section? What are the different techniques for

controlling access to critical section? Evaluate

12 Explain the event and event object based synchronization mechanism

for IPC Windows OS Understand

13 Explain the architecture of Device drivers Evaluate

GROUP – C (PROBLEM SOLVING &ANALYTICAL QUESTIONS)

1 Explain the critical section object for process synchronization? Why

critical section object is based synchronization fast? Analyze

2 Explain the different functional and non-functional requirements that

needs to be evaluated in the selection of RTOS Apply

Page 207:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 204

6.12 ASSIGNMENT TOPICS:

UNIT-I Introduction to Embedded Systems

S. No Questions

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

1. What is an embedded system? Explain the different applications of embedded systems? Remember

2.

Explain the various purposes of embedded systems in detail with

illustrative examples? Understand

3.

Explain the different classifications of embedded systems. Give an

example for each? Evaluate

4. Explain the different characteristics of embedded systems in detail?

Understand

5.

What are the different qualities attributes to be considered in an

embedded system design? Understand

6.

What is the operational quality attribute? Explain the important

operational quality attributes to be considered in any embedded system

design?

Understand

7.

What is the non-operational quality attribute? Explain the important

operational Understand

quality attributes to be considered in any embedded system

8.

Explain the quality attribute Response in the embedded system design

context? Evaluate

9.

a. Explain the quality attribute Reliability in the embedded system

design context?

Evaluate

b. Explain the quality attribute maintainability in the embedded system

design context?

10.

a. Explain the quality attribute information security in the embedded

system design context?

Evaluate

b. Explain the quality attribute safety in the embedded system design

context?

UNIT II

TYPICAL EMBEDDED SYSTEM

1.

Which are the components used as the core of an embedded

systems? Explain the merits and drawbacks? Understand

Page 208:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 205

2.

What is digital signal processing (DSP)? Explain the role of DSP in

embedded system design? Evaluate

3.

Evaluate

4.

Understand

5.

What are the different types of memories used in embedded systems

design? Explain the role of each? Analyze

6.

What is processor architecture? What is the different processor

architectures available processor/controller design? Give an example Evaluate

7.

What is programmable logic device? What are different types of PLDs?

Explain the role of PLDs in embedded system design? Evaluate

8.

a. Explain the on different onboard communication interface in brief?

Apply

b. Explain the on different external communication interface in brief?

9.

Explain the sequence of operation for communicating with an I2C slave

device? Apply

10.

Draw the interfacing diagram for connecting an LED to the port pin of a

microcontroller. The LED is turned ON when the microcontroller port pin

is at Logic 0. Apply

11.

Explain the sequence of operation for communicating with 1 wire slave

device Evaluate

UNIT- III

EMBEDDED FIRMWARE

1.

What is embedded firmware? What are the different approaches

available for embedded firmware development? Understand

2. Explain the role of RESET circuit in embedded system Analyze

3. Explain the role of Real Time Clock in embedded system Analyze

4. Explain the role of Watch dog Timer in embedded system Evaluate

5. Explain the role of Brown out protection circuit in embedded system Evaluate

6.

Explain the various steps involved in the assembling of an assembly

language program? Evaluate

7.

Explain the advantages of Assembly level language based on

embedded firmware development? Evaluate

8.

Explain the high level language based on embedded firmware

development technique? Apply

9. Give the examples for situations demanding mixing of C with Apply

Page 209:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 206

assembly? Explain the techniques for mixing of C with assembly?

10.

Give the examples for situations demanding mixing of assembly

with C? Explain the techniques for mixing assembly with C? Apply

UNIT- IV

RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

1.

What is the difference between a general purpose kernel and real

time kernel? Give an example for both? Analyze

2.

Explain the difference between memory management of general

purpose kernel and real time kernel?

Understand

3. Explain the TASK and Process in the operating system context?

Apply

4. Explain the memory architecture of a process?

Evaluate

5.

Explain various activities involved in the creation of process and

threads? Evaluate

6.

What is process control block (PCB)? Explain the structure of the

PCB Understand

7. What is task control block (TCB)? Explain the structure of the TCB Understand

8.

Explain how multithreading can improve the performance of an

application with an illustrative example? Apply

9.

Explain thread context switch and the various activities performed

in thread context switching for user level and kernel level threads Analyze

10.

Explain the various factors to be considered for the selection of

scheduling criteria? Apply

11.

Explain the different types of non-preemptive scheduling

algorithms? State the merits and demerits of each? Understand

12.

Explain the different types of preemptive scheduling algorithms?

State the merits and demerits of each? Understand

13.

What is the difference between Hard and Soft real time systems?

Give an example for Hard and Soft real time kernels?

Analyze

UNIT-V

TASK COMMUNICATION

1. Explain the various process interaction models in detail?

Analyze

Page 210:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 207

2.

What is inter process communication (IPC)? Give an overview of different

IPC mechanisms adopted by various operating systems? Evaluate

3.

Explain the synchronous and asynchronous messaging mechanisms for

IPC under windows kernel? Apply

4.

What is priority inversion? What are the different techniques adopted for

handling priority inversion? Understand

5.

Explain the different task communication synchronization issues

encountered in inter process communication? Evaluate

6.

Explain the interlocked functions for locked based mutual under windows

OS? Analyze

7.

What is semaphore? Explain the different types of semaphores. Where it is

used? Understand

8.

What is critical section? What are the different techniques for controlling

access to critical section? Evaluate

9.

Explain the event and event object based synchronization mechanism for

IPC Windows OS? Understand

10. Explain the architecture of Device drivers?

Evaluate

6.10 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS :

UNIT – I

1. Embedded Systems consists of __________ and _____________ to perform task.

(Hardware and Software)

2. The early advent of embedded systems were designed using ___________. (Vacuum Tubes)

3. ______________ was the first modern embedded system (Apollo Guidance Computer)

4. Stepper motor control unit is _________________ generation embedded system. (First)

5. Embedded System are classified into ______________ and ___________ based on triggering.

(Event triggered and Edge Triggered)

6. ____________ directly collect the data without any interface. (Digital Embedded System)

7. TCP/IP is a ____________ module for communication with embedded terminal. (wired)

8. The unit of throughput is termed as ______________ (Benchmark)

9. ____________ give susceptibility of system to failures and performance. (Reliability)

10. ___________________ of an embedded system refer to its ability of upgrading to new version.

(Evolvability)

11. Which of the following is the purpose of designing embedded system [ ]

a) Data Processing b) Control

c) Data Communication d) All the above

12. Which of the following is not characteristic of embedded system [ ]

a) Application and domain specific b) Reactive and Real time

Page 211:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 208

c) Reconfigurable OS d) Power concerns

13. The first modern embedded system, AGC was designed for ________ expedition[ ]

a) Mars b)Lunar c)Solar d) Venus

14. The world logic of AGC is [ ]

a) 16 bit b) 32 bit c) 64 bit d) 128 bit

15. The example of 3rd

generation embedded system is [ ]

a) Digital Telephone b) SCADA system

c) Robotics d) Mobile internet Devices

16. ___________ can be defined as the transmission of analog or digital data to various systems

17. from one system [ ]

a) Data Collection b) Data Communication c) Control d) Data Processing

18. The agility and quickness of a system in reacting to input changes is termed[ ]

a) Response b) Reliability c) Distributive d) Safety

19. The ideal value of maintainability in embedded system is expressed as [ ]

a) Ai = MTTR/MTBF b) Ai= MTTR/(MTBF+MTTR)

c) Ai= MTBF/MTTR d) Ai= MTBF/(MTBF+MTTR)

20. The quality attribute that refers how easily a system adopts to new working environment

[ ]

a) Evolvability b) Reliability c) Portability d) Maintainability

21. At which stage of product life cycle, the revenue reaches its peak [ ]

a) Product maturity b) Growth c) Product declination d) Product introduction

UNIT – II

1. Programmable logic devices are classified as _________ and __________. (CPLD&FPGA)

2. The order of storage of data in memory by processor in a multiple byte system is called ______

(Endianness)

3. A DRAM cell is made up of ___________ and __________ (MOSFET and Capacitor)

4. ____________ is a program or code storage menroy which is used to store the instructions of th

e program. (ROM)

5. _______ is used to store the date in the form of charge using MOS transistor gates. (DRAM)

6. A transducer device which is used to convert one form of energy (pressure) into another (electrical)

form is known as______________ (Sensor)

7. __________ is used for communication by transferring data in the form of packets aver mobile

communication network. (General Pocket Radio Service - GPRS)

8. __________ is wired high speed serial bus used to transmit data in packet format. (USB)

9. _______ is an output device used for visual indication of status of various signals. (LED)

10. _____________ is wireless short range technology used for data and voice communication. (Bluetooth)

11. Which of the following is not the part of domain specific processor [ ]

a) ASIC b) Micro processor c) Digital Signal Processor d) Micro Controller

12. A Von-Neumann architecture consists of [ ]

a) Program memory, CPU, data memory b) RISC, CPU, memory

c) I/O, CPU, Memory d) Program Memory, CISC, CPU

13. What type of instructions are used in CISC [ ]

a) Binary b) Variable Length c) Fixed Length d) Hexadecimal

14. Which of the following is not the unit of digital signal processor [ ]

a) Program Memory b) RAM c) Data Memory d) I/O Unit

15. Which of the following is not classification of RAM [ ]

a) Dynamic RAM b) Non-Volatile RAM c) Volatile RAM d) Static RAM

Page 212:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 209

16. The process adopted to solve the problems of execution speed in a processor based system is called

[ ]

a) Memory Shading b) Memory Shadowing

c) Memory Selection d) Memory Interfacing

17. What type of memory is required to store the binary code required for RTOS kernel

[ ]

a) Volatile b) Binary c) Pointer d) Non-Volatile

18. The transducer device which converts an electrical signal into its equivalent physical action is called

[ ]

a) Actuator b) Sensor c) LED Relay d) USB

19. Which devices are used to explain the capabilities of input/output of processor/controller

[ ]

a) PPI b) Piezo Buffer c) SPI d) I2C

20. Which of the following is nor\t the type of product level communication interface[ ]

a) Serial Interface b) Wired Interface c) Peripheral Interface d) Wireless Interface

UNIT-III

1. The Embedded system whose code memory consists of program instructions is known as __________

(Embedded Firmware)

2. _______________ is used to reset the processor during the execution of firmware. (Waychdog timer)

3. ___________ is a user readable notation of machine language. (Assembly Language)

4. In embedded systems, ________ is used to allow the device not to operate at a particular voltage level

when the system is in ON state. (Reset Circuit)

5. ___________ interrupts the OS kernel by generating an interrupt signal on interrupt line of

processor/controller (RTC – Real Time Clock)

6. ‘BL-51’ from keil software is an example for _________. (Linker and Locator)

7. The most commonly used high level language for the development of an embedded firmware is

_________ (C-Language)

8. ____________ is used to convert source file to object file. (Assembler)

9. ___________ monitors other requirements used in high-level language. (Cross-Coupler)

10. ISR stands for ____________. (Interrupt Service Routine)

11. Which of the following generates clock signal for processor/controller [ ]

a) Watchdog timer b) Brown-out Protection Circuit

c) Oscillator Unit d) Real Time Clock

12. The circuit used to protect the processor program execution when operating voltage drops below

threshold level [ ]

a) Reset Circuit b) Brown-out Protection Circuit

c) Timer Circuit d) All of the above

13. What does the letter ‘P’ represents in API [ ]

a) Program b) Peripheral c) Parallel d) Processor

14. ________ based approach is used in embedded products which demand real-time response.

[ ]

a) GPOS b) RTOS c) Both (a) & (b) d) None of the above

15. An Assembly language program line consists of __________ [ ]

a) LABEL b) OPCODE c) OPERAND d) All of the above

16. Which of the following is the RTOS system recourse [ ]

a) Windoiws CE b) Vx Works c) Symbian d) All of the above

17. _____________ is used to give instructions to processor [ ]

Page 213:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 210

a) LABEL b) OPCODE c) OPERAND d) None of the above

18. Which of the following represents the reference to the start of subroutine [ ]

a) Delay b) LCALL DELAY c) LABEL DELAY d) Any of the above

19. What are the advantages of Assembly Language based development [ ]

a) High Performance b) Low Level Hardware access

c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the above

20. ALP programming is ___________ [ ]

a) Portable b) Non-Portable c) Either (a) or (b) d) Neither (a) nor (b)

UNIT-IV

1. ___________ acts as an abstraction layer between system resources and user applications. (Kernel)

2. The advantages of micro kernel are ___________ and __________ (Robustness & Configurability)

3. The interrupt of timer is called __________ (Timer tick)

4. ____________ and __________ are two types of kernel. (Monolithic & micro)

5. ____________ is a process that posses a single sequential flow ofcontrol to execute the code. (Thread)

6. If the process is _________ then it switches to ‘Ready’ state from ‘Running’ state. (Preempted)

7. The model that represents the mapping of multiple user threads to a signle kernel thread is called

___________. (Many-to-one Model)

8. The act of concurrent execution of multiple thread under an operating system is called________ (Multi

threading)

9. In _____________ scheduling the last entered process is serviced first. (LCFS or LIFO)

10. The multitasking technique in which the CPU is shared co-operatively among the tasks is called

_______________ (Co-operative multitasking)

11. Which of the following is an example for micro kernel [ ]

a) LINUX b) Minix3 c) SOLARIS d) MS-DOS

12. The TASK ID present in process management is used for [ ]

a) Identification of task b) Indication of task

c) Indicate the priority d) Indication of pointers

13. Which type of data is stored in stack memory [ ]

a) Code data b) Global data c) Temporary data d) Permanent data

14. The execution of process life cycle is controlled by [ ]

a) Operating system b) Stack pointer c) Program memory d) Code memory

15. What are software entities that can share memory and execute concurrently [ ]

a) Processors b) Controllers c) Operators d) Threads

16. The process responsible for determining the order in which various tasks are taken up for

Page 214:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 211

17. execution depending on priority is called [ ]

a) Priority ordering b) Task Scheduling c) Task order d) Waiting Time

18. The process of executing multiple process simultaneously is called as [ ]

a) Multitasking b) Multiprocessing c) Multithreading d) Non of the above

19. In which multitasking, the task executes until it gets terminated or enters in wait state for I/O

[ ]

a) Preemptive b) Non Preemptive c) Cooperative d) Scheduled

20. Which of the following is incorrect pair [ ]

a) Job queue-processes in the system b) Device queue-process waiting for the I/O device

c) Ready queue-process waiting for CPU d) None of these

21. Which of the following is a preemptive thread that consists individual units of execution

[ ]

a) Kernel level thread b) System level thread c) Portable thread d) Solaris green thread

UNIT-V

1. Task communication refers to communication and execution of process in ________

(Operating System)

2. __________ a type of shared memory technique used by various RTOS.(Memory mapped object)

3. __________ implementation is OS kernel dependent (Socket)

4. _______________ based mutual exclusion technique combines the three different operations into

5. a single step. (Test and Set Lock - TSL)

6. In order to gain access to the memory-mapped object, a function called ________cis used in either

of the two processes. (Map view of file)

7. ____________ is an inter task communication mechanism that supports two-way communication of

message between tasks or task and ISR. (Message Queue)

8. RPC is also referred as _______________ or ____________ in object oriented programming language.

(Remote invocation or Remote Model Invocation - RMI)

9. The use of a resource by only one process at any time is referred as _________ (Mutual inculsion)

10. Condition in which a process does not get the CPU or system resources that are required to continue

its execution for a long duration is called to ___________ (Starvation)

11. The ___________ mechanism is an alternative to ‘Busy waiting’ mechanism. (Sleep and Wake up)

12. The inter task mechanism that supports two way communication of messages between task and ISR

13. is called [ ]

a) Message queue b) Mail box c) Signaling d) None of these

14. The logic end points in a bi-directional communication link between two applications in a network

15. is called [ ]

a) Socket b) Mapping c) Boarding d) Signaling

16. The area of the shared memory that which consists of two ends for flow of information wither in Uni-

directional or Bi-directional is called [ ]

a) Pipes b) IPC c) Mailbox d) Socket

17. Which of the following is not a message passing technique for IPC [ ]

a) Message queues b) Piping c) Mail box d) Signaling

Page 215:  · IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA(M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page No 1 HOLY MARY INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE (COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING) Bogaram (V),

IV Year ECE Student Handbook Dept of ECE

HITS,BOGARAM(V),KEESARA (M),MEDCHAL(D)-501301 Page 212

18. A binary semaphore is [ ]

a) Binary data dependent b) Kernel independent

c) OS kernel dependent d) Hexadecimal data dependent

19. Which of the following is not the functional requirement of RTOS [ ]

a) Kernel and Interrupt latency b) Modularization Support

c) Processor support d) Debugging tools

20. Process synchronization in IPC plays a major role in which type of communication

[ ]

a) Digital b) Inter Process c) Intra modular d) None of these

21. Which of the following is used for handling priority inversion [ ]

a) Priority inheritance b) Priority inversion c) Priority resource d) Priority Ceiling

22. What are the three operations combined by TSL [ ]

a) Searching, Reading, Testing b) Reading, Testing, Setting

c) Reading, Testing, Sending d) Searching, testing, setting

23. The situation in which one process is waiting for a resource which is currently under the

24. control of same other process [ ]

a) Bound off problem b) Race Condition c) Dead lock d) Interrupt Latency